JP2019208673A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing the decline of game amusement.SOLUTION: The game machine comprises: determination means for determining whether to switch to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to a player than usual when a game ball enters start winning regions 11,12; setting means for setting one of a plurality of prescribed set values; and presentation control means capable of executing a prescribed presentation. The determination means executes determination on the basis of the set value, and the possibility of determination to switch to the advantageous game state by the determination means varies depending on the set value. The setting means may set the set value depending on determination of which set value is set.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 106

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is established such that a game ball wins a start opening, a determination is made as to whether or not a gaming state is advantageous to the player. In this determination, the probability that it is determined that the gaming state is advantageous to the player cannot be arbitrarily set in the gaming machine.

JP 2018-47333 A

  However, there is still room for improvement with respect to gaming machines in which it is determined whether or not the gaming state is advantageous to the player in order to improve the gaming interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the subject is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A determination means for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than normal by the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Setting means for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The setting means may set the setting value by determining which setting value to set.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view for explaining the standby state of the movable board body, (B) is a front view for explaining the moving state of the movable board body, and (C) is a front view for explaining the rotating state of the movable board body. It is a front view of indicator. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of a game control board. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of a production control board. (A) is a table | surface which shows general figure relevant determination information, (B) is a table | surface which shows special figure relevant determination information. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a normal variation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table when the set value is “1”, (B) is a jackpot determination table when the set value is “2”, and (C) is when the set value is “3”. (D) is a jackpot determination table when the setting value is “4”, (E) is a jackpot determination table when the setting value is “5”, and (F) is a setting It is a jackpot determination table when the value is “6”. (A) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (B) is a reach determination table. It is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a 1st prefetch determination table. It is a 2nd prefetch determination table. (A) is a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a game state setting table. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a demo animation, (B) is a figure which shows an example of a setting screen. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the 1st normal background image, (B) is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd normal background image, (C) shows an example of the 3rd normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for probability change, (E) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for time reduction. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot opening effect, (B) is a figure which shows an example of a round effect, (C) is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot ending effect. (A) is a figure which shows an example of an effect symbol, (B) is a figure which shows an example of an effect symbol display area. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure change effect of a reach-less lose. It is a figure showing an example until it becomes reach after a special figure change production starts. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a movable body effect. It is a figure showing an example of operation production. It is a figure showing an example of a holding | maintenance effect. It is a figure showing an example of a hold icon change notice. It is a figure showing an example of a hold icon change notice. It is a flowchart of a game control main process. It is a flowchart of a setting value setting process. It is a flowchart of a game control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing and represents a continuation of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of effect control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process, showing a continuation of FIG. 46. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a game control board side of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a part of flowchart of the sensor detection process by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship between the setting value which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, and an out ball | bowl determination value. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship between the setting value which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and a difference number determination value. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the first composite symbol, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the second composite symbol, (C) is a diagram showing an example of the third composite symbol, and (D) is a first set value. The figure which shows an example of a symbol, (E) is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd setting value symbol, (F) is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd setting value symbol. It is a set value symbol pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the stop symbol pattern determination process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a lottery result information determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of a set value effect determination process. It is a flowchart of the stop symbol pattern determination process which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a set value effect execution determination table. It is a stop pattern pattern determination table for setting value effects. It is a stop symbol pattern determination table for normal use. It is a stop symbol pattern determination table for normal use. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination table which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of a success / failure reverse effect determination process. It is a success / failure effect execution determination table. It is a continuation number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of a set value effect process. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the set value effect process, showing a continuation of FIG. 76. It is a jackpot symbol type determination table according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a jackpot game control table which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a game state setting table which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot game effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot game effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot game effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a blessing production determination table. It is a blessing production determination table. It is a flowchart of a blessing effect process. In 9th Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows a mode that the fluctuation | variation display of an effect symbol starts in a normal start aspect. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the setting value effect determination process which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd setting value production determination table. It is a jackpot determination table according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a jackpot determination table according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a gaming state setting table according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a small hit game control table concerning a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of special operation processing concerning a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a table | surface which shows the selection ratio of the jackpot, the jackpot, and a loss which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the game control board which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the setting value setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a setting value determination table.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention which is a premise of a characteristic part of a gaming machine of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each of the drawings to be referred to, the same part is denoted by the same reference numeral, and redundant description regarding the same part is omitted in principle. In the following, for simplification of description, the names of information, signals, physical quantities, members, etc. for the symbols or signs are omitted or abbreviated by writing symbols or signs that refer to information, signals, physical quantities, members, etc. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical configuration of gaming machine A pachinko gaming machine PY1 which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, the horizontal and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are the horizontal and vertical directions (in front view) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, “front” means a direction approaching the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 from the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and “rear” means a direction approaching the pachinko gaming machine PY1 from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. ,explain.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a gaming board unit YU including a gaming board 1 and a gaming machine frame 2 in which the gaming board unit YU is accommodated. The gaming machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to the game store, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is mounted, and a state before being rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. And a door 23.

  The outer peripheral shape of the outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 are substantially the same when viewed from the front. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

  The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23m in which a large opening having a substantially vertically long rectangular shape is formed in the approximate center, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate and is formed in a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is installed in a gaming store, the player in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can visually recognize the gaming area 6 formed on the front surface of the gaming board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. it can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is only necessary that the gaming area 6 is visible from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 through the transparent plate 23t.

  A handle 72k that can be rotated to launch a game ball is provided at the lower right of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount (rotation angle) by which the handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude of the force (launch strength) applied to the game ball in order to launch the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is launched with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k.

  In addition, an upper plate 34 that largely protrudes forward and a lower plate 35 that is disposed directly below the upper plate 34 are provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23m. In the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operation portion that protrudes from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 of the first effect button 40k so as to be visible is formed in a hemispherical shape. Furthermore, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing a game ball supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34. The upper surface of the lower plate 35 is provided with a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

  Furthermore, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 projecting forward are provided on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the transparent plate 23t in front of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L disposed on the left side and a speaker 52R disposed on the right side face downward and are predetermined in the left-right direction. They are arranged side by side at a distance. In addition, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided below the right decorative body 32. The operation portion of the second effect button 41k is shaped like a rod. Further, a frame lamp 53 that can emit light is provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

  Note that the position and number of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not hinder the game.

  Next, the game board unit YU will be described with reference to FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be described. The game board 1 is composed of a transparent synthetic resin plate. An opening 1A having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front is formed in the approximate center of the game board 1.

  A substantially ring-shaped center decorative body 61 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 so as to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decorative body 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decorative body 61, and between the left portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61 are formed.

  An area surrounded by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, and the like forms the game area 6 on the front surface of the game board 1. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into a game area 6 and other areas by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. In addition, a region surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launch region 7 through which the launched game ball can pass to go to the game region 6.

  The game area 6 is an area in which a game ball launched by the operation of the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game on the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In the game area 6, a large number of game nails (not shown) are projected. The game nail is suitable for the game balls that enter the game area 6 and flow down the game area 6 to the general winning port 10, the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the gate 13, the grand winning port 14, and the like. The route that leads to

  A general winning device 10 </ b> D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When game balls enter the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 10 are discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as they are.

  In addition, a first start winning device 11D is provided immediately below the center of the center decorative body 61 in the game area 6. In the first start winning device 11D, a first start port 11 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. The first start winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first start port 11 is constant (invariable) without changing the ease of entering the game ball. When a game ball enters the first start port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the first start port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

  Note that a warp portion 61w is formed from the left side portion to the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61 to allow the game ball to pass inside. The entrance to the warp portion 61 w is formed on the left side of the center decorative body 61. The game balls that have entered the warp section 61w exit from the exit through the inside of the warp section 61w. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp portion 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61. A lower guiding portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided at the tip of the stage 61s. A first start port 11 is provided directly below the lower guiding portion 61y.

  A second start winning device (so-called “electric chew”) 12D is provided immediately below the first start port 11 in the game area 6. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second start port 12 that can be changed between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which the game ball can enter. The second start port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an electric chew opening / closing member 12k provided in the electric chew 12D. That is, the second start port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k.

  The electric chew opening / closing member 12k is a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening / closing member 12k can protrude forward from a retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the game area 6. When the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes perpendicularly to the game area 6, and the second start port 12 is opened to allow entry. Specifically, a vertical portion standing at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is received and guided to the second start port 12 from the horizontal portion.

  In this way, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is in the open state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

  A gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. The game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

  A large winning device 14D is provided on the right side of the first start winning device 11D in the game area 6 and downstream of the gate 13. The large winning device 14D is formed with a large winning opening 14 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The special winning opening 14 is closed and opened by the AT opening / closing member 14k provided in the special winning device 14D. That is, the special winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening / closing member 14k.

  The AT opening / closing member 14k is a movable member made of a substantially horizontally long rectangular flat plate when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big prize opening 14. A horizontal rotation shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening / closing member 14k. The AT opening / closing member 14k can rotate about 90 degrees so that the upper end of the AT opening / closing member 14k falls forward. When the AT opening / closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening / closing member 14k protrudes perpendicularly to the game area 6, and the big winning opening 14 is opened so as to be able to enter the ball.

  In this way, it is possible to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 14 only when the AT opening / closing member 14k is in the open state. When a game ball enters the special winning opening 14, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. Note that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

  Further, the upper surface of the game area 6 is formed obliquely downward to the left below the winning device 14D, and a guide path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided in the game area 6 (front surface of the game board 1). Projecting forward. Note that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow toward the second start port 12, but basically cannot enter the first start port 11.

  The first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big winning port 14, and the game ball entering the general winning port 10 and the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 are summarized into the first start port 11, This is collectively referred to as “winning” to the second start opening 12, the big winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

  By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side and a right game area 6B on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The operation mode of the handle 72k for firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is referred to as “left-handed”. On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k for firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is referred to as “right-handed”.

  In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow when the left-handed game ball is fired is referred to as a first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the right-handed game ball is fired. Such a flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also configured by a number of game nails (not shown).

  A first start port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first start port 11 or the general winning port 10 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by left-handed. On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a second start port 12, a gate 13, and a special winning port 14 are provided. Therefore, the player can aim to win the gate 13, the second starting port 12, or the big winning port 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting right.

  In addition, two out ports 19 for discharging game balls that have been driven into the game region 6 but did not win any of the game ports 6 to the outside of the game region 6 are provided substantially at the bottom of the game region 6. Yes. In addition, the number of winning balls by winning in each winning opening can be set as appropriate.

  Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1 will be described. The board effect unit EU is a unit composed of a plurality of devices mainly performing effects. An image display device 50 and a panel movable device 55 are attached to the panel effect unit EU.

  The image display device 50 includes a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display unit 50a that can display a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1.

  The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The panel movable body 55k includes a horizontally long and plate-like lifting member 55k2 that is maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center in the left-right direction of the lifting member 55k2. The board movable body 55k is disposed between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state where the board movable body 55k is arranged at the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically, the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is slightly below the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that only a part of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 can be visually recognized by the player and most of it cannot be visually recognized in the standby state (see FIG. 3A).

  And the board movable body 55k can descend | fall from the initial position to the predetermined | prescribed operating position as a whole, can raise from the operating position, and can return to an initial position (refer FIG. 3 (B)). The predetermined operation position is a position where the movable board body 55k is positioned substantially at the center of the opening 1A in front view. Here, the predetermined work position can be set as appropriate, and the board movable body 55k can be set at a position above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A in a front view. Good.

  Further, the rotation member 55k1 can rotate in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions when viewed from the front centering on a rotation axis formed in the front-rear direction at the center (see FIG. 3C). The rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the movable panel body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, when it is held at the operating position, and when it moves from the operating position to the standby position.

  In addition, the position and the number of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game.

  Next, the display devices 8 arranged on the right side (portion other than the game area 6) of the game area 6 formed at the front surface of the game board 1 at the right side of the approximate center in the vertical direction will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display 8 includes a special figure 1 display 81a for variably displaying a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1"), a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2"). And a special figure display 82 that variably displays a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “common figure”). In addition, the display device 8 includes a special figure 1 hold indicator 83a for displaying a later-described special figure 1 hold number and a special figure 2 hold indicator 83b for displaying a later-described special figure 2 hold number. .

  The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery with the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 is performed. In addition, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery with the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 12 is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are collectively referred to as “special figure”, and special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as “special figure lottery”. The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as “special figure display 81”. Further, the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b are collectively referred to as a "special figure hold indicator 83".

  The special figure variable display notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the special figure variable display, the special figure is variably displayed and then stopped. The special figure (stop special figure) displayed in a stopped state is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the variable display result. When the special figure that is stopped and displayed is a predetermined special figure, a big hit game with the opening of the special winning opening 14 is performed.

  The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents a special figure corresponding to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, it will be the first, second, fifth, and sixth from the left, such as “□□ ■■ □□ ■■” (□: lit, ■: unlit). An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the rightmost LED is turned on as “■■■■■■■ □” finally. This lighting mode is a losing symbol and represents losing. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all LEDs may be turned off as a lost pattern.

  In the variable display of the special figure, the fluctuation display of the special figure is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The variation display mode of the special figure is a mode in which each LED is lit so that light repeatedly flows from left to right, for example. In addition, the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink all at once unless each LED is stopped (lighted display in a specific mode).

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, even if a game ball wins the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, special drawing lottery and variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately. Specifically, this is a case where a winning of the game ball is made to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning. This reserved special drawing lottery and variable display of the special drawing are referred to as “special drawing holding”.

  In the special figure hold, the special figure 1 lottery held based on the winning at the first start port 11 and the “special figure 1 hold” representing the variable display of the special figure 1 and the second start port 12 are won. There is a special figure 2 lottery held based on the above and "Special figure 2 hold" representing variable display of special figure 2. Then, the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a displays the number of special figure 1 suspensions, that is, the number of special figure 1 lotteries that have been suspended and the number of variable displays of special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b displays the number of special figure 2 hold, that is, the special figure 2 lottery held and the variable display number of special figure 2.

  It is possible to provide the upper limit value for the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold. In addition, when an upper limit value is provided for the number of special figure 1 holds and the number of special figure 2 holds, the number of special figure 1 holds and the number of special figure 2 holds may be the same or different. In the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit value of the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to “4”.

  Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs. By turning on the LEDs as many as the number of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold, The number of FIG. 1 hold and special figure 2 hold is displayed. In the following, the number of special figure 1 hold is referred to as “special figure 1 hold number (U1)”, and the number of special figure 2 hold number is referred to as “special figure 2 hold number (U2)”. In addition, “special figure 1 hold number” and “special figure 2 hold number” are collectively referred to as “special figure hold number”. Furthermore, the “special figure 1 hold indicator 83a” and the “special figure 2 hold indicator 83b” are collectively referred to as a “special figure hold indicator 83”.

  In addition, the variable display of the usual figure is executed when the usual figure lottery is performed in response to the winning of the game ball at the gate 13. And the variable display of a normal map alert | reports the result of a general map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, the stop map is displayed after the normal map is changed and displayed. The stop-displayed general map (stop normal map) is identification information representing the result of the general-draw lottery derived as the variable display display result. If the stop-displayed common figure is a predetermined specific figure, an auxiliary game with the opening of the second start port 12 is performed.

  The common map indicator 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting state of the general map display 82 represents a general map corresponding to the result of the general map lottery, that is, the result of the general map lottery. When the result of the regular drawing is a win, both LEDs are finally turned on, such as “□□” (□: lit, ■: unlit). This lighting mode is a winning symbol and represents a winning symbol. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is lost, only the right LED is lit finally, such as “■ □”. This lighting mode is a losing symbol and represents losing. In addition, the lighting aspect of LED corresponding to the result of a general drawing lottery is not limited, It can set suitably. For example, you may employ | adopt the aspect which turns off all LED as a lose pattern.

  Further, before the usual figure is stopped and displayed, the usual figure is displayed for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the usual variable display mode is such that both LEDs are alternately lit. In addition, the mode of the usual variable display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink simultaneously if each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode). .

2. Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, there is a game control board 100 that performs control (game progress) related to a game capable of obtaining game profits, and according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100 Electric power is supplied to the production control board 120 that performs control related to the production, the image control board 140 that performs image control, the payout control board 170 that performs control related to game ball payout, and the boards 100, 120, 140, and 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

  A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190. By turning on / off the power switch 191, power on / off is switched.

  In the vicinity of the game control board 100, a set value cylinder 70 for changing a set value to be described later, and a set value switch 71 are provided. The set value cylinder 70 is provided with an insertion hole 70A for inserting a dedicated set key. When a setting key (not shown) is inserted into the insertion hole 70A, the set value cylinder 70 can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the reference standby state. Then, as will be described later, the operation of the set value switch 71 becomes effective by rotating the set value cylinder 70 clockwise from the standby state by 90 degrees. The set value switch 71 is configured to be pressed. Further, a set value display 87 for displaying the current set value is mounted on the surface of the game control board 100. The set value display 87 is composed of a red 7-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter “game control microcomputer”) 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program is mounted on the game control board 100. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. In addition, special games lottery, special figure variable display, jackpot game, game state setting described later, general figure lottery, universal figure variable display are available for games that can acquire gaming profits to be controlled by the game control board 100. And auxiliary games.

  The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing a program and a table for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, a game A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in the ROM 103 is included.

  The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing a game control main process and a game control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a prefetch determination table, a jackpot game control table, a gaming state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary A game control table and the like are stored. The game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

  The game RAM 104 is provided with a special figure storage unit 105. Here, the special figure storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, when a game ball is awarded to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, special figure hold can be generated, but when special figure hold is possible, that is, the special figure hold number is When the upper limit is not reached, determination information including various random numbers for performing special drawing lottery or the like is acquired based on the winning. This determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as special figure reservation. In the following, the determination information acquired by winning the game ball at the first start port 11 is referred to as “special figure 1 related determination information”, and acquired by winning the game ball at the second start port 12. The determination information is referred to as “special figure 2 related determination information”. The special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as “special map related determination information”.

  The special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 storage unit 105 a in the special figure storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 storage unit. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 storage unit 105b in the special figure storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 storage unit. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit value of the special figure 1 hold number is set to "4". Also, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit value of the special figure 2 hold number is set to "4".

  Further, the game RAM 104 is provided with a set value storage unit 107 for storing set value data indicating set values to be described later.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100. In addition, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

  The various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning port sensor 10a, a first starting port sensor 11a, a second starting port sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning port sensor 14a. .

  The general winning opening sensor 10 a detects a game ball won in the general winning opening 10. The first start port sensor 11 a detects a game ball that has won the first start port 11. The second start port sensor 12 a detects a game ball that has won the second start port 12. The gate sensor 13 a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The special winning opening sensor 14 a detects a game ball that has won the special winning opening 14.

  Further, the various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a set value cylinder sensor 70a and a set value switch sensor 71a.

  Further, the set value cylinder sensor 70a can detect the rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70. When there is a rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70, the set value cylinder sensor 70a detects the rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70 and sends a detection signal indicating that the set value cylinder 70 has been rotated. Output to 100.

  On the other hand, the set value switch sensor 71a can detect a pressing operation of the set value switch 71. When the set value switch 71 is pressed, the set value switch sensor 71a detects the press operation of the set value switch 71, and a detection signal indicating that the set value switch 71 is pressed is sent to the game control board. Output to 100.

  The various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening / closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening / closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

  Note that the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not hinder the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game.

  Further, the game control board 100 is connected to the display devices 8 (the special figure display device 81, the general view display device 82, and the special drawing hold display device 83) and the set value display device 87. Display control of these indicators 8 and set value indicator 87 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

  The game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a launching device 72 is connected. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

  The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 101 or a signal from the connected card unit CU, and pays out a winning ball or a rental ball. The payout balls and rental balls to be paid out are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting.

  The launching device 72 is a device that launches a game ball. The handle 72k constitutes an operation unit or an input unit that receives an operation for causing the launching device 72 to launch a game ball, and is included in the launching device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the contact of the player with the handle 72k, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the launch control circuit 175.

  Further, a launch volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The launching device 72 drives the launching motor 72m so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the launching volume knob 72b. Note that in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds in a state where the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

  The game control board 100 transmits various commands including information related to the game to the effect control board 120 as the game progresses. The effect control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game by the game control board 100 (game control content) based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

  The connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that can only transmit signals from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120. That is, a not-shown unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 as communication direction regulating means.

  As shown in FIG. 7, an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “effect control microcomputer”) 121 that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY <b> 1 according to a program is mounted on the effect control board 120. The effect control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control unit that controls effects together with the image control board 140, the audio control circuit 161, and the sub-drive board 162 described later. However, the effect control unit includes at least an effect control board 120, and a game effect, an effect of waiting for customers, and an operation promotion using an effect device (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.). It is only necessary to be able to control the production.

  Note that the effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special drawing fluctuation effects, hold effects, jackpot game effects, etc.), customer waiting effects, operations of the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. An operation promotion effect that prompts an operation in an effective period (operation effective period) is included.

  The effect control microcomputer 121 stores the effect ROM 123 storing a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses on the game control board 100, the effect RAM 124 used as a work memory, and the effect ROM 123. An effect CPU 122 for executing the program is included.

  The effect ROM 123 stores programs for performing effect control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. The production ROM 123 may be externally attached.

  In the effect RAM 124, a start winning command holding storage unit 125 for storing a start winning command to be described later, a symbol specifying command storage unit 126 for storing a symbol specifying command to be described later, and a special symbol variation for storing a special symbol variation start command to be described later. A start command storage unit 127 and a set value flag storage unit 128 for storing a set value flag to be described later are provided.

  In addition, an image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. To do. The connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both transmission of a signal from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of a signal from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. Two-way communication connection.

  The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores a program for image control, an image RAM 143 that is used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the program stored in the image ROM 142. . Further, the image control board 140 is a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores data of an image displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM (Video) that is used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145, or the like. Random Access Memory (146) and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144 are provided. All or part of these electronic components may be configured as one chip.

  In the CGROM 145, for example, image data for displaying an image displayed on the image display device 50 (still image data or moving image data, specifically, a character, an item, a design, a figure, a character, a number, a symbol, etc. And image data such as a background image).

  The VDP 144 reads out image data from the CGROM 145 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 121 and expands the image data in the expansion area in the VRAM 146. Then, the developed image data is appropriately combined and the image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. Thereby, various effect images are displayed on the display unit 50a.

  The display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 121 receives voice, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects.

  Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be formed of a substrate and mounted with a CPU. In this case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may execute sound control. Further, in this case, audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

  The effect control board 120 is connected to various sensors serving as an input unit and various actuators serving as a drive source via a predetermined relay board (not shown). The effect control board 120 receives signals output from various sensors. The effect control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

  The various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 40a and a second effect button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k has been pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k has been pressed. When the first effect button sensor 40a and the second effect button sensor 41a detect that each is operated, the first effect button sensor 40a and the second effect button sensor 41a output a signal corresponding to the detected content to the effect control board 120.

  Note that the type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not hinder the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not hinder the game.

  Various actuators connected to the effect control board 120 include a rotating member motor 55m1 and a lifting member motor 55m2. The rotating member motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The lifting member motor 55m2 can raise or lower the lifting member 55k2. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

  In the following, the operation of “the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2” may be collectively referred to as “the operation of the movable panel 55k”. In addition, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as “rotating, lowering or raising the movable panel body 55k”.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub drive board 162 based on a command received from the game control board 100 or the like. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting / extinction and light emission color, or lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and the frame lamp 53 is controlled according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. Note that the data stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

  Note that the CPU may be mounted by configuring the sub drive substrate 162 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may execute lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like and operation control of the panel movable body 55k. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. Next, main games performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

3-1. Games related to general plans First, the games related to general plans will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute a lottery drawing when the launched game ball passes through the gate 13. When the general map lottery is performed, the general map display 82 performs variable display of the general map (stop display after the variable display is performed). Here, there are a winning symbol and a lost symbol in the usual symbols to be stopped and displayed. In addition, the losing symbol of the ordinary figure is also referred to as “losing ordinary figure” in order to distinguish it from the losing symbol of the special figure described later.

  When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the lost map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. In the following, the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 when the variable display or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as “establishment of the general variable start condition”.

  The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is able to perform a series of games such as a general drawing lottery, a variable display of a general diagram, and an auxiliary game by obtaining the general diagram related determination information when the general diagram variable start condition is established. As shown in FIG. 8 (A), the common figure related determination information to be acquired includes a normal symbol random number. The normal symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Winning determination The winning determination is a determination for determining whether or not to win (whether or not to execute an auxiliary game) using, for example, a hit determination table as shown in FIG. The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state to be described later. When associated with the gaming state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in a non-short-time state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in a time-short state (short-time hit determination table).

  In each winning determination table, normal symbol random number determination values (ordinary symbol random number determining values) are appropriately assigned to the winning and losing results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table, and determines whether or not it is a hit or lose. If the result of the hit determination is a win, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal figure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is lost, the lost map is stopped and displayed with the variable display of the normal map. Note that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Universal map variation pattern determination / universal map variable display The universal map variation pattern determination is a determination for determining a universal map variation pattern using, for example, a universal diagram variation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 9B. The normal map variation pattern is identification information related to a predetermined item related to a variable display of a general map such as a normal map change time.

  The usual pattern variation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state). When associated with a gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state), the general-purpose fluctuation pattern determination table includes a normal-time fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time-short normal-time fluctuation pattern determination table) and a short-time used in the non-time-short state. There is a common figure fluctuation pattern determination table (time-short normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the state.

  Each normal pattern variation pattern determination table stores one general map variation pattern, which is a result of the general pattern variation pattern determination, for each general map to be stopped. That is, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can vary the normal time variation time in the non-time-short state and the time-short state. For example, in the non-time-short state, the variable display of the general map when the display of the general map of the loss (the general map of the loss) is stopped is determined to be a normal map change pattern in which the normal map change time is 30 seconds. For the variable display of the normal map when the stop display is performed, the normal map change pattern is determined so that the normal map change time is 30 seconds. Also, in the short-time state, the variable display of the general map when the lost map is stopped and displayed is determined to be a normal map change pattern in which the normal map change time is 5 seconds, and the normal pattern when the win symbol is stopped and displayed. The variable display is determined to be a normal pattern change pattern in which the normal map change time is 5 seconds. In addition, about these usual time fluctuation time, it is possible to change suitably.

  Then, the variable display of the general map of the normal map change time associated with the general map change pattern determined in the general map change pattern determination is performed by the general map display 82. Thus, by performing the hit determination and the normal variation pattern determination, the variable display of the normal map is performed on the general map display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of a normal figure, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped (derived) as a display result (result of a common figure lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric Chu 12D opens.

  The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game constituent elements) include various elements such as the number of times the electric Chu 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9C, it is possible to associate a gaming state (non-short time state / short time state) with the auxiliary game control table. In other words, the auxiliary gaming component can be associated with the gaming state (non-short state / short state). The specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

  The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can make the opening time of the electric chews 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-short-time state and the auxiliary game in the time-short state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-short-time state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for a first opening time when it is difficult to win a game ball such as 0.2 seconds in the electric chew 12D. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the short-time state, for example, the game ball is won in the electric chew 12D for longer than the first opening time such as a 2.5-second opening twice with a 1.0-second interval (closing). The electric chew 12D is opened for a second opening time that is easy to make.

  In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time-short state is also referred to as “short opening auxiliary game”. On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the short-time state is also referred to as “long opening auxiliary game”. In addition, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in the auxiliary game. For example, it is released several times in one auxiliary game, such as opening once and then opening again with an interval of closing once. You may comprise as follows.

3-2. Games related to special figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the special drawing 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first starting port 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 display 81a performs the variable display of the special figure 1 (stop display after performing the variable display), and notifies the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special figure 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the special drawing 1 lottery results include a big hit and a loss.

  When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. When the lose symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed and the game based on the winning is finished.

  Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the special drawing 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second starting port 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 display 81b performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (stop display after performing the variable display), and notifies the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special figure 2 which is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the special figure 2 lottery results include a big hit and a loss.

  When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. Further, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is completed.

  Further, in the following, winning a game ball at the first start port 11 is referred to as “establishment of a first start condition”, and winning a game ball at the second start port 12 is “establishment of a second start condition”. That's it. Further, “satisfaction of the first start condition” and “satisfaction of the second start condition” are collectively referred to as “satisfaction of the start condition”. In addition, the special symbol lost pattern is also referred to as a “special lost symbol” in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned common symbol lost pattern.

  The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs a series of games such as a special drawing lottery, a special drawing variable display, and a jackpot game by obtaining the special drawing related determination information when the starting condition is established. And in order to perform variable display of a special figure, various determinations are performed for the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure related determination information to be acquired includes special symbol random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and special symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers.

  The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for making a jackpot determination. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (determination information) for performing reach determination. The special figure variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Next, each determination performed using the special figure related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot determination The jackpot determination is to determine whether a jackpot is determined (whether or not a jackpot game is executed) using the jackpot determination table, in other words, whether it is a jackpot or lose. The jackpot determination table can be provided for each set value as shown in FIGS. 10 (A) to 10 (F), for example. That is, the jackpot determination table can be associated with the set value.

  The set value is a value such as a parameter associated with a probability that the jackpot determination is determined to be a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as “jackpot probability”). As will be described later, the set value can be set when the game control board 100 is powered on. By operating the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 described above, the set value can be set for each pachinko gaming machine PY1.

  In the basic embodiment, six types of setting values 1 to 6 are set. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used when the setting value is “1”, a jackpot determination table used when the setting value is “2”, and a setting value “3”. Jackpot determination table used sometimes, jackpot determination table used when the set value is “4”, jackpot determination table used when the set value is “5”, and when the set value is “6” There is a jackpot determination table used.

  Further, each of the jackpot determination tables associated with the set values includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as “normal probability jackpot determination table”) and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state. (Hereinafter referred to as “high probability jackpot determination table”). In addition, the kind of setting value is not restricted to basic embodiment, It can set suitably.

  In each jackpot determination table associated with the set value and the gaming state, a special symbol random number determination value (special symbol random number determination value) is distributed to the jackpot and the loss that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table associated with the set value and the gaming state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) to 10 (F), for each set value, the special symbol random number determination value in which the high probability jackpot determination table is determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table. There are many settings. Furthermore, for the same gaming state, as the set value becomes higher, more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be jackpots are set. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to determine that the jackpot

  In addition, about how to distribute the special symbol random number determination value with respect to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations, it is possible to appropriately change.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination determines the jackpot symbol type (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 11A, for example, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot It is to be. The jackpot symbol type can be associated with the jackpot content, in other words, the jackpot component (content advantageous to the player) composed of a game privilege given to the player.

  In the jackpot symbol type determination table, a special symbol type that is variably displayed (special symbol 1 / special symbol 2), in other words, a prize that is caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that generated the jackpot symbol type determination) is performed. It is associated with the type of starter (first starter 11 / second starter 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and the jackpot symbol used when performing variable display of special figure 2 There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

  Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol random number determination value (a jackpot symbol random number criterion value) is distributed to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines the type of the jackpot symbol by collating the acquired jackpot symbol random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

  The jackpot symbol of special figure 1 and the jackpot symbol type of special figure 2 can be set as appropriate. For example, the jackpot symbol of special figure 1 as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. The jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol C are provided, and the jackpot symbol D, the jackpot symbol E, and the jackpot symbol F are provided as the jackpot symbol of the special figure 2. Can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 11A, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. Yes. Note that the distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Also, the type of jackpot symbol can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach determination In the reach determination, for example, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, it is determined whether or not to generate a reach in a special figure variation effect described later using a reach determination table as shown in FIG. Is to decide.

  The reach determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state). In the case of being associated with a gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in a non-short-time state (non-time-short reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in a time-short state (short-time reach). Determination table).

  In each reach determination table, reach random number determination values (reach random number determination values) are assigned to the reach determination results “with reach (generate reach)” and “without reach (not generate reach)”. Yes. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the acquired reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is reach or not (whether or not reach is generated).

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the number of reach random number determination values determined to be “with reach (generate reach)” may be different between the non-short-time reach determination table and the short-time reach determination table. Is possible. In the following, the result of reach determination performed on the assumption that the result of the jackpot determination is “losing” is “reach with reach (generates reach)” is referred to as “reach with reach” and “no reach ( "Reach is not generated)" is sometimes referred to as "no reach".

3-2-4. Special Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination Special figure fluctuation pattern determination is performed in a special symbol variation pattern determination table (a special symbol variation pattern, for example, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 13) regardless of whether the jackpot determination result is a big hit or a loss. It is to determine a fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation pattern) of variable display of a special figure using a determination table.

  The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters relating to special figure variation time, so-called “scale”, and a flow of production (effect contents) of a special diagram variation effect described later. The special figure variation pattern includes identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the jackpot symbol type determination, and the result of the reach determination in addition to the special chart variation time and the flow of the special map variation effect (effect contents). It is also possible to Note that the type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is a type of special symbol (special figure 1 / special figure 2) to be variably displayed as a judgment target, in other words, the start opening where the winning due to the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment is performed. It is possible to associate with a type (first start port 11 / second start port 12). That is, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table: FIG. 12) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and a variable display of special figure 2 are provided. There is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table: FIG. 13) used when performing.

  Each special figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state). That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table includes a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time reduction special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table) used in a non-short-time state and a special figure 1 used in time-short state. There is a fluctuation pattern determination table (temporal special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table). On the other hand, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is similarly used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time reduction special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-short-time state and in the short-time state. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (short-time special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table).

  Each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state) can be further associated with a jackpot determination result and a reach determination result. That is, the non-short-time special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the short-time special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table respectively have a jackpot symbol, a reach with loss, and a non-reach loss. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table also have a jackpot symbol, a reach loss, and a non-reach loss, respectively.

  Furthermore, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for each reachless lose associated with the gaming state can be associated with the special figure 1 holding number. For example, it is used when the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is 0 to 2, and when the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is 3-4. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing without reach. Similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for each reachless lose associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 holding number. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for reachless loss used when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 3 to 4. And a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for losing without reach.

  Then, the special figure display 81 displays the special figure fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation time according to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination. Then, after the special figure variable display, if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the special figure variable display display result (result of the special symbol lottery), the next special figure variable display is not immediately performed, The jackpot game is executed.

  In addition, it is possible to associate an effect flow of a special figure variation effect as shown in the third column from the right in the tables of FIGS. 12 to 13 with each special figure variation pattern. Here, typical effects constituting the effect flow of the special figure fluctuation effect associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern will be described.

  As the effects constituting the effect flow of the special figure change effect, there are normal change, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle effect.

  Normal fluctuations indicate that the effect symbols that were displayed in a stopped state began to fluctuate, and that each individual symbol that made up each effect symbol was variably displayed at a high speed to the extent that it was difficult to recognize, and that the special symbol variable display was started. It is a production to do. And, the special figure fluctuation effect (the part from the start of the change of the production pattern to the stop of the fluctuation) related to the lossless reach fluctuation, and the part until the reach is established (determined) in the special figure fluctuation production where the reach occurs It may consist of.

  The N reach is immediately after the reach is established (determined) through normal fluctuations, for example, in the state where the production symbols constituting the reach are maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) at the position where the reach is temporarily stopped. It is an effect that the design symbol decelerates and fluctuates at a lower speed than the normal variation. The jackpot expectation suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach described later. When the special figure variation effect ends with N reach, the remaining one effect symbol that varies at the low speed stops. In the case of losing, the remaining one effect symbol stops at an effect symbol different from the effect symbols constituting the reach. When the special figure variation effect is not completed at N reach, the remaining one effect symbol is changed again at high speed, and the reach is maintained to be changed from N reach to L reach or SP reach (switched).

  The L reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, which is performed for a longer time than the N reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and a predetermined position (for example, a left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image compared to the N reach is reduced. In the state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper left of the display unit 50a at the upper left of the display unit 50a, the background image is switched to the L-reach dedicated image (the L-dedicated video flows). In L reach, an animation image by 2DCG is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As the contents of the L reach, a video of a scene different from a game related to the SP reach described later, such as a special training for the main character to acquire a special technique, is displayed.

  SP reach is an effect that can be executed after N reach, for example, which is performed for a longer time than L reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and a predetermined position (for example, a left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image compared to the N reach is reduced. In the state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper left of the display unit 50a at the upper left of the display unit 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach dedicated image (a video dedicated to SP reach flows). In the SP reach, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as the effect of the SP reach, a video of a scene in which the team to which the main character belongs and the team to which the main character rival belongs belongs is displayed.

  The battle effect is, for example, an effect that can be executed after reaching in a short time state, and is an effect that suggests that the degree of expectation for jackpot is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in the battle effect, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbol constituting the reach is reduced and at a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is in the upper left of the display unit 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is in the display unit 50a). In the state moved to (upper right), the background image dedicated to the battle effect is switched (the video dedicated to the battle effect flows). In battle effects, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display unit 50a.

  In the “reach maintained state” in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects, the display symbols 50a include the effect symbols that constitute the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects. In addition to the state that can be visually recognized, for example, it is assumed that the effect symbols constituting the reach for a predetermined period in relation to a dedicated background image include a state where it is difficult to visually recognize or cannot be visually recognized from the display unit 50a. Further, the effects of the normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects can be changed as appropriate. Further, the effects constituting the special figure changing effect are not limited to these, and can be appropriately added or reduced.

  Also, as shown in the second column from the right in the tables of FIGS. 12 to 13, it is possible to attach a name to the special figure fluctuation pattern in association with the jackpot determination result and the contents of the special figure fluctuation production. . The special figure fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot may be collectively referred to as “big hit fluctuation”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the loss may be collectively referred to as “losing fluctuation”.

  Furthermore, the special figure fluctuation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot determination result is “SP reach fluctuation”, the special figure fluctuation pattern in which L reach is performed is “L reach fluctuation”, and the special figure fluctuation is in N reach. Special figure fluctuation patterns that end the production may be collectively referred to as “N reach fluctuation”. Further, the loss variation with reach is referred to as “loss variation with reach”, and the loss variation without reach may be collectively referred to as “normal loss variation”.

3-2-5. Pre-reading determination Before the jackpot determination, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can make a pre-reading determination based on the acquired special figure related determination information using, for example, a pre-reading determination table as shown in FIGS. is there. The look-ahead determination table indicates the type of start opening (first start opening 11 / second start opening 12) related to the start winning, in other words, the type of special figure variably displayed according to the start winning (special drawing 1 / special drawing). 2). In other words, the prefetch determination table wins the first start port 11 and wins the first prefetch determination table (FIG. 14) when the variable display of FIG. 1 is performed and the second start port 12. And a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 15) when variable display of 2 is performed. Note that the prefetch determination performed based on the first prefetch determination table is also referred to as “first prefetch determination”, and the prefetch determination performed based on the second prefetch determination table is also referred to as “second prefetch determination”.

  The prefetch determination table can also be associated with a gaming state (normal gaming state / high probability high base gaming state / low probability high base gaming state) described later. That is, the look-ahead determination table includes a look-ahead determination table used in the normal gaming state (a normal game state pre-read determination table) and a look-ahead determination table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game). A state prefetch determination table) and a prefetch determination table (low probability high base gaming state prefetch determination table) used in the low probability high base gaming state.

  That is, the prefetch determination table includes a first prefetch determination table used in the normal gaming state, a first prefetch determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a low probability high base gaming state. A first prefetch determination table used, a second prefetch determination table used in a normal gaming state, a second prefetch determination table used in a high probability high base gaming state, and a low probability high base gaming state And a second look-ahead determination table.

  In addition, the special-figure variation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure performed by winning the start opening 11 or 12 is specified by the prefetch determination using the prefetch determination table shown in FIGS. That is, before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning is performed, the special figure variation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the prefetch determination result. In the process of specifying the special figure variation pattern, the success or failure of the jackpot is also specified as the prefetch determination result. If “big hit” is specified in the prefetch determination, the jackpot symbol type is also specified as the prefetch determination result. In addition, when specifying the success or failure of the jackpot using the prefetch determination table, a special symbol random number determination value corresponding to the set value is used.

  A prefetch determination result including information related to the special figure variation pattern is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a prefetch determination result as it is generated. Note that what information is specified as the prefetch determination result can be changed as appropriate.

  As described above, by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination, the special figure display 81 performs variable display of the special figure. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of special symbol lottery) in the special symbol variable display, the next special symbol variable display is not performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Jackpot game

  The jackpot game consists of multiple round games with opening / closing of the grand prize winning opening 14, the opening from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (also referred to as OP), and the final round game Ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

  Note that it is possible not to provide OP or ED. In the following, the round game of the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as “round”. For example, the first round game (first round) is also referred to as “1 round (1R)”, and the 10th round game is also referred to as “10 rounds (10R)”.

  The pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, the jackpot game can be associated with the type of jackpot symbol. One or more types of jackpot games can be set.

  In the jackpot game control table, elements constituting the jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements) are stored. The jackpot game component includes the number of round games, the number of times the big prize opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the big prize opening where each opening is performed, and the time for closing until the next opening. (Closing time), opening time (opening time), ending time (ending time), and the like.

  The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can control the jackpot game using, for example, a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. That is, it is possible to set the type of jackpot game and the jackpot game component for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 16A will be described.

  In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as “first jackpot game”), the round game is played ten times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first jackpot game.

  In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as “second jackpot game”), the round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second jackpot game.

  In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as “third jackpot game”), the round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third big hit game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third big hit game.

  In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as “fourth jackpot game”), the round game is played ten times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth jackpot game.

  In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as “fifth jackpot game”), the round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth big hit game.

  In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter, also referred to as “sixth jackpot game”), the round game is performed six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the sixth big hit game.

  In each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big prize opening sensor 14a, even if the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 14 has not passed, The winning hole 14 is closed and the round game is finished. Further, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

  Further, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 16, which type of jackpot game is executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed by a method different from this. May be. For example, a device that can be distributed to two winning gates is provided in the game area 6, and if one prize opening is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed, while when the other winning opening is won, predetermined Either a jackpot game consisting of more round games or a jackpot game consisting of less than a predetermined number of round games may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, the game state that can be controlled by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a jackpot gaming state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and a non-jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot game is not being executed. The non-hit gaming state includes a normal gaming state that is a basic gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The factors that are “advantageous to the player” relating to the specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second start port 12. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second start port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

  The advantage to the player regarding the jackpot probability is that the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it is easier to win the jackpot. The ease of opening the second start port 12 is advantageous to the player because the ease of opening the second start port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the second start port 12 is opened per unit time. It means that time will be longer.

  As the specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second start port 12 are advantageous to the player, and the jackpot probability only in the second advantageous to the player. Only the specific game state and the opening time per unit time of the second start port 12 can be set to three types of the third specific game state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, it is also possible to mount a part of the three types of specific game states without mounting all these three types of specific game states on the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

  Here, as a partial gaming state in which attention is paid to the jackpot probability, a state where the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the player is advantageous to the player with respect to the jackpot probability is referred to as a “high probability state”. In contrast, a jackpot probability is a normal probability in the normal gaming state, and a state where the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is referred to as a “normal probability state”.

  Further, as a partial gaming state in which attention is paid to the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state. A state where the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is referred to as a “short-time state”. On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state where the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is referred to as “non-time-saving”. State.

  Here, the non-time-short state and the time-short state will be described in detail. As described above, the time-short state has a longer open time of the electric chew 12D per unit time than the non-time-short state. That is, the time-short state is a state in which the second start port 12 is more easily awarded than the non-time-short state. Here, a specific method for facilitating winning in the second start port 12 in the time-saving state rather than the non-time-saving state will be described.

  For example, by setting the time reduction state to a state in which the normal time fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than the non-time reduction state, it is possible to make it easier for the second start port 12 to win a prize in the time reduction state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time reduction state, the normal time fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal time fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time reduction state. To be determined. As a result, the number of executions of the regular drawing lottery per unit time increases in the shorter time state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-short-time state and the short-time state, if the probability of winning in the hit determination and the opening time of the electric Chu 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the normal drawing lottery per unit time Since the number of executions is large, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

  Further, by setting the time-short state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time-short state, it is possible to easily win the second start port 12 in the time-short state. . For example, as described above, in the non-short-time state, the electric chew 12D is opened for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the short-time state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit determination is the same as the normal variation time, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time will be equal. Since the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is longer, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

  Furthermore, by making the time-short state easier to be determined as a win in the hit determination than in the non-time-short state, it is possible to easily win the second start port 12 in the time-short state. For example, as described above, in the non-short-time state, it is determined that the hit is determined with a probability of 6600/65536, whereas in the time-short state, it is determined that the hit is determined with a probability of 59936/65536. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time of the electric Chu 12D and the usual fluctuation time in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability that it is determined to be a hit in the hit determination is high. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the open time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

  As described above, in the short-time state, it is easier to win the win than the non-time-short state, the normal fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, and the opening time of the electric Chu 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be long. When the three conditions are satisfied, in the time-short state, the open time of the electric chews 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-short state, and the winning to the second start port 12 can be facilitated. As a result, the so-called “base”, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, increases. Therefore, in the short time state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big win without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed compared to the normal game state. In other words, it can be said that the time reduction state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time reduction state.

  In the time-short state, all the three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second start port 12 may not be satisfied, but only some of the conditions may be satisfied. Finally, in the short-time state, the open time of the electric chews 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-short state, and it is only necessary that the winning to the second start port 12 becomes easy.

  Also, in the short-time state, the special-figure variable display per unit time is executed less frequently, for example, by making it easier to select a special-figure fluctuation pattern with a shorter special-figure fluctuation time than in the non-time-short state. You may make it the average of figure fluctuation time become low. As a result, in the short-time state, the pace at which the special figure hold is digested becomes faster, and an effective winning (a winning that can be stored as the special figure holding) at the start port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game.

  In the following description, the first specific gaming state is referred to as “high probability high base gaming state”, and the second specific gaming state is referred to as “high probability low in association with the content of the advantage for the player for each specific gaming state. The “base gaming state” and the third specific gaming state are also referred to as “low probability high base gaming state”. Further, the normal gaming state is also referred to as “low probability low base gaming state”.

  Therefore, it can be said that the low probability low base gaming state is a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time-short state. Similarly, the low probability high base gaming state is controlled in the normal probability state and short time state, the high probability low base gaming state is controlled in the high probability state and non-time short state, and the high probability high base gaming state is controlled in the high probability state and short time state. It can be said that it is a gaming state.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled in the low probability low base gaming state, the low probability high base gaming state, the high probability low base gaming state, the high probability high base gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be obtained, so the jackpot game state can also be said to be a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can also be referred to as “advantageous gaming state” which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

  Note that the high probability high base gaming state and the high probability low base gaming state are advantageous to the player over the low probability low base gaming state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. is there. Further, the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 12 is higher than the non-time-short state. A gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot gaming state, the big winning opening 14 having a larger number of winning balls than the first starting slot 11 and the second starting slot 12 is opened, so that the jackpot gaming state has a low probability low base game. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state.

  Also, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on, the normal gaming state is set first. The jackpot game state is set by performing a stop display of the jackpot symbol. On the other hand, the specific game state is set by winning a jackpot game and executing a jackpot game. Next, the setting of the specific game state will be described.

3-5. Setting of a specific gaming state The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can newly set a specific gaming state as the jackpot game ends. In other words, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and advanced in a specific game state. The duration of this specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, the specific gaming state can be continued until the next jackpot is won. In addition, the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued can be limited.

  When the duration of the specific gaming state is limited, the specific gaming state can be terminated when the end condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. For the high probability high base gaming state, when the end condition is satisfied, the low probability high base gaming state or the high probability low base gaming state may be set. In this case, the newly set low probability high base gaming state or high probability low base gaming state may be continued until the next jackpot is won. Also, the same or different end condition may be provided for the newly set low probability high base game state or high probability low base game state, and the normal game state may be set when the end condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the end condition for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the end condition, for example, the number of executions of the special figure variable display can be set. In addition, the number of executions of the special figure variable display is not limited, and the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls fired after the jackpot game, the number of passes to the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state The ending condition may be derivation of the result of ending in a lottery of no (so-called “falling lottery”). Furthermore, these elements may be set alone as the end condition, or may be set in combination.

  These end conditions may be set the same for all the specific game states that can be set after the jackpot game, or may be set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You may do it. Furthermore, the end condition may be different for each specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence / absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. 16B, the jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol D, or jackpot symbol E is high after the jackpot game ends. The game may be controlled in the high probability base gaming state. Here, the high-probability high-base game state can be continued until a big hit is won without setting an end condition. Further, the game may be controlled in the low probability high base gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol F is finished. Here, an end condition is provided for the low probability high base game state, and the special condition variable display can be set to 100 times as the end condition. The relationship between the jackpot type symbol and the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence / absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited thereto.

  Further, paying attention to the jackpot gaming profit, the jackpot where the game progresses in a high probability state after the jackpot game is also referred to as “high probability jackpot”. Furthermore, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and a short time state after the jackpot game is also referred to as “probability jackpot”. In addition, a jackpot in which a game progresses in a normal probability state and a short time state after a big jackpot game is also referred to as a “short time jackpot”.

4). Next, main effects performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or higher conceptual attribute). The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can set a customer waiting effect mode, a normal effect mode, a probability variation effect mode, a time reduction effect mode, and a jackpot effect mode as effect modes.

  In the customer waiting effect mode, a special variable display is performed in the “low probability low base gaming state”, “low probability high base gaming state”, “high probability low base gaming state” and “high probability high base gaming state”. It is an effect mode that can be set when there is not, and indicates a standby state in which special figure variable display is not performed. The customer waiting effect is performed when the customer waiting effect mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 17A, a customer waiting demonstration video G100 that introduces the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is displayed on the display unit 50a. Further, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 17B, a setting screen G101 for performing settings related to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Is displayed. Settings related to effects include volume settings for sounds output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display unit 50a, and frequency settings for effects to be executed. It should be noted that setting items related to effects can be set as appropriate. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demo video G100.

  The normal effect mode is an effect mode that can be set in the “low probability low base game state” and indicates the normal game state. Further, a plurality of lower-order effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode can be provided. For example, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided as the lower-level effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode.

  In the following, the effect mode of the lower hierarchy belonging to the effect mode is also referred to as “effect stage”. Accordingly, the first normal effect mode is also referred to as “first normal effect stage”, the second normal effect mode is also referred to as “second normal effect stage”, and the third normal effect mode is also referred to as “third normal effect stage”. Say.

  As described above, when a plurality of effect stages belonging to the normal effect mode are provided, the effect stages can be sequentially switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. Although the switching condition can be set as appropriate, for example, as the switching condition, it can be set that a special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot. Furthermore, as a switching condition, it is possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure change effect based on the SP reach change is executed.

  As will be described later, reach may occur in the special figure fluctuation effect, but the special figure fluctuation effect is established for all sections of the special figure fluctuation effect when the reach does not occur, and when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before the reach and a rear part after reach when the reach occurs. The former part is constituted by the above-mentioned “normal fluctuation”.

  Then, in the front part of the first normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing the city view is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front part of the second normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18B: second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front part of the third normal stage, a background image (FIG. 18C: third normal background image G113) mainly representing the inside of the restaurant is displayed on the display unit 50a. On the other hand, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, and in the normal effect mode. A dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

  Note that the dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the normal effect mode may be a background image common to the normal effect mode regardless of the type of the effect stage, or may be a different background image for each effect stage.

  Further, the normal performance mode may be set even in the “high probability low base game state”, and the normal performance mode may be a performance mode indicating that it is a non-time-short state. Alternatively, a predetermined effect mode that is set only in the “high probability low base game state” and is different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Furthermore, in a low probability low base game state and a high probability low base game state that occur under certain conditions, a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be set.

  The probability variation effect mode is an effect mode that can be set in the “high probability high base game state” and indicates a high probability high base game state. For example, as shown in FIG. 18D, the background image representing the universe (probability change background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a and the probability change BGM is output from the speaker 52 in the preceding stage of the probability change effect mode. . In addition, in the latter part of the probability variation effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the probability variation effect mode is displayed.

  The time reduction mode can be set in the “low probability high base gaming state” or “high probability high base gaming state”, and is either the low probability high base gaming state or the high probability high base gaming state. This is an effect mode indicating that the state is in effect. In the preceding stage of the time reduction effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18E, a background image (time reduction background image G130) representing the sky is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the time reduction BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In the latter part of the time reduction effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time reduction effect mode is displayed.

  The short-time effect mode can be set to an effect mode that is set only in the low probability high base game state and indicates the low probability high base game state.

  In addition, in either or both of the probability variation effect mode and the short-time effect mode, as in the normal effect mode, a plurality of effect stages for the effect mode are further provided, and the effect stage is switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. Anyway.

  The jackpot effect mode is an effect mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the “hit game state”, and is an effect mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot effect mode, for example, during the opening in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19 (A), on the display unit 50a, the opening image G1 that suggests the start of the jackpot game or the right-handed image G2 that prompts “right-handed” The jackpot opening effect is displayed. In addition, during the opening, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as the background of the opening image G1 or the right-handed image G2 as a jackpot opening effect. .

  In the jackpot effect mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19B, the right-handed image G2 is displayed on the display unit 50a following the opening, and the round image indicating the number of rounds. A round effect is displayed in which G3 or a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of prize balls that have been paid out is displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, the background image (round background for the round hitting game G2 in the background of the right-handed image G2, the round image G3, and the winning ball number image G4 on the display unit 50a. The image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

  Further, during the ending in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19C, the display unit 50a suggests the ending image G5 indicating the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of paid-out balls. A jackpot ending effect is displayed in which the total prize ball number image G6 to be displayed is displayed. In addition, during the ending, a background image (ending background image G202) according to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as a jackpot ending effect on the background of the ending image G5 or the total winning ball number image G6. Is done.

  In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are also referred to as “jackpot game effect” as an effect executed in the jackpot game. That is, a jackpot game effect is performed in the jackpot effect mode.

4-2. Next, the special figure variation effect will be described. When the variable display of the special figure is started, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a special figure variation pattern and a special figure lottery result (a jackpot determination result, a jackpot symbol type determination result, a reach determination result, and The special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result).

  In the special figure variation effect, the display unit 50a displays a variation of the effect symbol in a superimposed manner on a predetermined background image. In the change display of the effect symbol, it stops after the effect symbol changes. That is, after the special symbol variation time and the effect symbol variation display are performed, the variation is stopped, and the effect symbol stop display is performed. Basically, the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the effect symbol.

  In the special figure variation effect performed on the display unit 50a, it is also possible to use an image other than the effect symbol variation display. Further, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, special effects using various effect devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a panel movable device 55, a first effect button device 40, and a second effect button device 41 are used. It is possible to perform a figure variation effect.

  Next, an effect design displayed on the display unit 50a in the special figure variation effect executed according to the special map variable display will be described. The effect symbol is also identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect symbols are provided. Specifically, one of the components of the effect symbol constitutes identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect symbols are provided depending on the difference of the identification information.

  For example, as shown to FIG. 20 (A), a production | presentation symbol can be comprised with the number of 1-9, and nine production | presentation symbols can be provided. Here, the numbers themselves constitute identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result. In addition, since the numbers are different from each other, the effect designs composed of the numbers 1 to 9 are strictly different images. Then, the effect symbol of number “1” is defined as an effect symbol G10a. Similarly, the effect symbols of numbers “2” to “9” are effect symbols G10b to G10i. For convenience, when the individual effect symbols 1 to 9 are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as “effect effect G10”.

  The effect symbols G10 of “3” and “7” are red, and the effect symbols of “1”, “2”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “8”, and “9”. G10 is blue. That is, the color is also set as a component of the effect design G10. In addition, you may change suitably what is set for the structure and identification information of production | presentation symbol G10. For example, you may add other components, such as the character matched with each number, to production design G10.

  Next, an effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 20 (B), the left effect center region 50b1, the middle effect symbol region 50b2, and the right effect symbol are divided into the left side, the center, and the right side in which the display unit 50a is divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction. It can be the region 50b3. The effect symbol G10 is displayed in any of the left effect symbol region 50b1, the middle effect symbol region 50b2, and the right effect symbol region 50b3.

  In particular, in the preceding stage of the special symbol variation effect, the effect symbol G10 displayed in the left effect symbol region 50b1 is collectively referred to as “left effect symbol EZ1”, and the effect symbol G10 displayed in the middle effect symbol region 50b2 is “middle”. The effect symbol EZ2 ”is collectively referred to, and the effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol region 50b3 is generically referred to as“ right effect symbol EZ3 ”. That is, in the left effect symbol region 50b1, the middle effect symbol region 50b2, and the right effect symbol region 50b3, the effect symbol G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in common, but the effect symbol is displayed at a relative display position. When distinguishing G10, they are expressed as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 20B, a small symbol area 50c for variably displaying small symbols can be provided in a section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end of the display portion 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, the small symbol can be variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, although the design of a small symbol can be set as appropriate, for example, when the effect symbol is composed of numbers, the small symbol can be configured by reducing the effect symbol as it is. In addition, when the effect design is composed of numbers and characters, it is possible to extract only the number portion and configure a small design.

  In FIG. 20B, the left effect symbol region 50b1, the middle effect symbol region 50b2, the right effect symbol region 50b3, and the small symbol region 50c are clearly indicated by a one-dot chain line. It is described to represent the range of the medium effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and is not actually displayed.

  Further, as described above, the effects constituting the effect flow of the special figure change effect include normal change, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effect. Here, some of these will be described.

4-2-1. Normal fluctuation The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform a normal fluctuation in the special figure fluctuation effect. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that variable display of the special figure has started. Next, the normal fluctuation will be specifically described. As small symbols, the small symbol KZ1, the small symbol KZ2, and the small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left effect symbol EZ1, the medium effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol region 50c.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 21A, in the display unit 50a, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol are displayed. When the special symbol variable display is started from the state in which the symbol KZ3 is stopped, the special symbol variable display is not performed, and the special symbol variable display is awaited, FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, the special figure variation effect is started with the start. Specifically, variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and variation display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

  The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at high speed immediately after the start of the variability display. While the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at high speed, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically on the background side such as the background images G111 to G115. Are displayed with transparency that is easy to view.

  Then, if the special figure variation pattern of the special figure variable display is a special figure fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss (for example, normal loss fluctuation), the reach of the special figure is terminated without occurrence of reach (special figure). With the stop display), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed with the losing eyes peculiar to the losing without reach (so-called “separated eyes”).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 21 (D), toward the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Thus, the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops at the approximately vertical center position, and as shown in FIG. 21E, the medium effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at the approximately vertical center position.

  Finally, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stopped in a state of being aligned horizontally at the substantially central position in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. Confirm (stop display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped completely stop at a break, that is, when the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are produced as production symbols EZ1 to EZ3. The symbols are stopped at the same time and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped.

  In the example of FIG. 21, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left effect symbol EZ1, right effect symbol EZ3, and middle effect symbol EZ2. An aspect is not restricted to this, It can set suitably.

  On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, N loss fluctuation), in the display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. As shown in A), the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 22 (B), the variable display of the special figure is started, and the variation display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variation display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3. Let's start.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (C), the left effect design EZ1 related to the number “5” temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then the same number as shown in FIG. 22 (D). The right effect symbol EZ3 related to “5” temporarily stops in parallel in the horizontal direction at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and reaches (reach occurs or is established). Even if reach is established in the effect symbol, the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is continuously performed.

  In the example of FIG. 22, when the reach is established, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3. However, the temporary stop mode is not limited to this and should be set appropriately. Can do. In addition, the number of production symbols constituting the reach is not limited to “5”. Also, the temporary stop position is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the production symbols constituting the reach are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

  As described above, the entire period of the special figure fluctuation effect in the case of loss without reach and the period from the start of the special figure fluctuation effect in the case where the reach occurs until the reach is established are normal fluctuations.

4-2-2. N reach The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform N reach when reach is established after normal fluctuation. The N reach is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery was a “hit”, and functions as an effect for causing the player to expect a big hit. Next, N reach will be specifically described.

  When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 22D, N reach is performed from that point. In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 23A, the state where the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), the medium effect symbol EZ2 that is changing and displaying (scrolling) at a high speed in the normal mode is gradually decelerated.

  If the special figure fluctuation pattern of the special figure variable display is a special figure fluctuation pattern of reach loss (for example, N loss fluctuation), the intermediate effect symbol EZ2 is temporarily stopped at a substantially central position in the vertical direction from the state where the reach is established. Then, the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed. At this time, since the reach has been established, as shown in FIG. 23 (C), the medium effect symbol EZ2 made up of numbers different from the numbers constituting the reach (“4” in FIG. 23 (C)) is temporarily stopped. To do. Then, along with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state as shown in FIG. A stop display of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is performed.

  In addition, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped completely stop at a losing eye peculiar to the loss with reach, that is, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped, three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed. However, it stops at the same time as the lost pattern peculiar to the loss with reach that is the same as the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped. Note that the contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

  When the special figure variation effect is not completed at N reach, the remaining one effect symbol is changed again at high speed, and the reach is maintained to be changed from N reach to L reach or SP reach (switched).

4-2-3. SP Reach The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect that suggests that the possibility that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery was “big hit” is higher than the N reach and the L reach, and functions as an effect to make the player expect a big hit. . The established reach is maintained even in the SP reach. For example, as shown in FIG. 24A, at the start of the SP reach, the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and the small amount in the display unit 50a. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the symbol area 50c (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display unit 50a).

  Also, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 24A, a background image dedicated to SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a, an enemy character appears, As shown in FIG. 24B, an image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has been started is displayed at the center of the display unit 50a. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach ““ Enemy batter XX ”in FIG. 24B” and an effect image G11b that complements the title image G11a. The

  Next, as shown in FIG. 24C, a scene in which the main character and an enemy character that is a rival to the main character are confronting each other is displayed. The contents of SP reach consist of a confrontation scene between a baseball pitcher and a batter. Here, the main character is a pitcher and the enemy character is a batter.

  Thereafter, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 25A, the hero character throws the ball, and as shown in FIG. 25B, the ball advances toward the enemy character, and FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character begins to swing the bat. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 25D, the ball and the bat approach each other, and a scene is reached where the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character is about to be settled. This scene constitutes a branch point (win / branch branch point) of whether the main character wins or loses in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter.

  After the winning / losing branch point, if the special figure variable pattern of the special figure variable display is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the big hit (for example, SP big hit fluctuation), as shown in FIG. After the enemy character flies in the sky and wins the confrontation, as shown in FIG. 26 (B-1), the hero character who picks up the enemy character and screams on the mound is displayed. A predetermined sound effect is output. At this time, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

  In this way, the display of the main character who wins the confrontation and screams and the output of the predetermined sound effect constitutes an effect for notifying the jackpot (a jackpot notifying effect). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (C-1), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

  On the other hand, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern with reach (for example, SP loss fluctuation) after the winning or losing branch point, the background for SP reach is not performed without performing the jackpot notification effect. In image G115, as shown in FIG. 26 (A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in FIG. 26 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. Loss notification effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (C-2), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the reach for reach. Note that the content of the SP reach is not limited to the content that the characters confront each other in baseball, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

  Next, the movable body effect and the operation effect performed in the special figure variation effect will be described. When the movable body effect and the operation effect are performed as a part of these effects in the form of being incorporated in the aforementioned SP reach, N reach, or jackpot game effect, and when these effects are performed independently There is. First, the movable body effect will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the movable object at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body effect is an effect using a movable device such as the panel movable device 55, for example, and functions as an effect that suggests the expectation of jackpot or development to SP reach.

  For example, when the movable body effect functions as an effect suggesting the development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 27A, when the special figure variation effect is developed from N reach to SP reach, first, FIG. As shown in (B), the board movable device 55 is operated, and the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position in a front view and is held at that position for a predetermined time. Then, as shown in FIG. 27C, the panel movable body 55k is raised to the standby position, and the panel movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, a scene in which the main character is displayed large on the display unit 50a is displayed, and the SP reach is developed. The operation content of the movable device in the movable body effect can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation Effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, etc. at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. It is possible to perform operation effects including The operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result effect is an effect that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion effect. Functions as a production.

  For example, as described above, when the winning or losing branch point is reached in the SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is effective (first effect button operation effective period) occurs, and this first effect button operation effective period As shown in FIG. 28A, an effect (first effect button operation promotion effect) that prompts the operation of the first effect button 40k is performed.

  In the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button operation promotion image G12 is displayed on the display unit 50a. The first effect button operation promotion image G12 is an image (first operation button image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k and an image (press operation image) representing the operation mode (that is, the press operation) of the first effect button 40k. G12b and an image (first effect button operation effective period remaining time image) G12c representing the remaining time of the operation effective period (first effect button operation effective period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k.

  The first effect button operation effective period remaining time image G12c is composed of a curved progress bar, so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the first effect button operation effective period as time elapses. To change. FIG. 28B shows a state in which the first effect button operation effective period has occurred and 1/3 of the first effect button operation effective time has elapsed.

  Then, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a jackpot special figure fluctuation pattern (for example, SP jackpot fluctuation), after the first presentation button 40k is pressed down during the first presentation button operation effective period, Alternatively, the operation result effect is performed after the remaining time of the first effect button operation effective period has expired without the first effect button 40k being operated in the first effect button operation effective period.

  As an operation result effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 28C, the panel movable device 55 is operated, the panel movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, and is held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1. Rotates for a predetermined time. As described above, the movable body effect is included in the operation result effect. Furthermore, at this time, the normal effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display unit 50a as an operation result effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 28D, the normal effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the operation of the operation result is ended when the movable board 55k is raised. When the operation result effect ends, a jackpot notification effect is performed.

  On the other hand, if the special figure variation pattern of the special figure variable display is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, SP loss fluctuation), the first effect button 40k is pressed down during the first effect button operation effective period. Or, even if the first effect button 40k is not pressed down and the remaining time of the effect button operation effective period runs out, the operation result effect is not performed and the loss notification effect is performed.

  The operation result effect is not limited to the operation of the panel movable device 55 or the display of the normal effect image G13, but can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation effect is not limited to the special figure variation effect, and can be executed in the jackpot effect.

4-5. Pre-reading effect Next, the pre-reading effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display subject to special figure hold will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a pre-reading effect on a special figure 1 hold or a special figure 2 hold where a special drawing lottery is not performed based on the result of the prefetch determination at an arbitrary timing of the special figure change effect. is there. The pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests the degree of jackpot expectation for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold, and functions as an effect that expects a big hit from before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the hold. As an example of the pre-reading effect, there is a hold icon notice using a hold effect representing a special figure hold. Here, the hold effect and the hold icon notice performed in the normal effect mode will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, the holding effect is performed in a holding display area 50d formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape in a substantially central section at the lower end of the display unit 50a. The hold display area 50d includes a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4 obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially equally in the left-right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are provided in order from the left end to the right end.

  In the first area 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display is generated first on the basis of the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold, which occurs first among the reserved special figure 1 hold. A hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to the fourth area 50d4, the second to fourth occurrences of the reserved special figure 1 hold are generated based on the special figure 1 related random numbers corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. A hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold on which the special figure 1 variable display is performed is displayed second to fourth.

  In the following, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first area 50d1 will be referred to as "the special figure 1 hold in the hold order 1". Similarly, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "the special figure 1 hold in the hold order 2", "the hold order 3 Special Figure 1 Hold "and" Special Figure 1 Hold in Hold Order 4 ". That is, the existing special figure 1 hold is referred to as “holding order 1” to “holding order 4” in the order of occurrence.

  The variable display area 50e is formed on the left side of the hold display area 50d. In the fluctuation display area 50e, a fluctuation icon representing the special figure 1 fluctuation display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the object indicated by the change icon displayed in the change display area 50e is different from the object indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d. Strictly speaking, it is a “hold effect” corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. Is not included, but the display of the hold icon and the display of the change icon are related, so in the following, the display of the hold icon and the display of the change icon are collectively referred to as “hold effect”. . Further, the hold icon and the fluctuation icon are collectively referred to as “icon”.

  In FIG. 29A, the hold display area 50d and the variable display area 50e are clearly indicated by a one-dot chain line, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are clearly indicated by a broken line. It is described to represent the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the variable display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

  Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be described. In the following description, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 fluctuation display is being performed (the special figure fluctuation production is in progress), and the special figure 1 holding number (U1) is “2”. Under this situation, as shown in FIG. 29 (B), in the first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the special figure 1 hold currently held (the order of the hold). 1 is displayed, and in the second area 50d2 (not shown) described above, the special figure 1 hold (holding order 2) generated next to the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA2 is displayed. The hold icon HA3 representing the special figure 1 hold) is displayed. In addition, in the above-described fluctuation display area 50e (not shown), a fluctuation icon HA1 representing the currently executed special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. In addition, the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 29B is a normal mode.

  Thus, in the hold effect, the special figure 1 is displayed side by side from the left end of the hold display area 50d in the order in which the hold occurs. That is, the variable display of the special symbol that is being held, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbol based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105 is individually displayed with a hold icon. The

  Then, as shown in FIG. 29C, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the variation icon HA1 representing the special-figure variation display being executed until just before that is erased. When the special symbol variable display (special drawing variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the fluctuation display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) is not displayed. It moves to the illustrated first region 50d1. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are shifted one by one to the left. This is because the special symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3 is the first special figure 1 hold that is generated first among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is because the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are adapted to the situation in response to the special map variable display to be started next.

  Further, since the hold icon HA2 displayed in the fluctuation display area 50e represents the special figure 1 fluctuation display being executed, it becomes the fluctuation icon HA2 when displayed in the fluctuation display area 50e. That is, as a word that precedes the “icon”, the icon displayed in the hold display area 50d is “hold”, and the icon displayed in the change display area 50e is “change”. In other words, when the start condition of the special symbol variable display is established for the special figure hold indicated by the hold icon when the hold icon is displayed, the special symbol variable display related to the establishment of the start condition is displayed. The corresponding hold icon is displayed as a variable icon. Further, when the hold icon is changed to the change icon, in other words, the icon is enlarged about twice when the icon is moved from the hold display area 50d to the change display area 50e.

  Then, when a game ball is won at the first starting port 11 and a special figure 1 hold is generated from this situation, a new hold is generated in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold as shown in FIG. The icon HA4 is displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown).

  By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes the success / failure information and the special figure variation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can display the hold icon in the normal mode or the special mode based on the success / failure information and the special figure variation pattern information. Displaying the hold icon in a special manner is called “hold icon notice”.

  If the display mode of the hold icon is a special mode, that is, if the hold icon notice is made, the player can have an expectation that he may win a jackpot with a variable display of a special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. . Next, a specific example of the hold icon notice will be described. As a specific example of the hold icon advance notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon HA4 shown in FIG.

  As a type of hold icon notice, a special mode is set immediately after the hold icon is displayed. In other words, when the special figure 1 hold occurs (at the time of winning the first start port 11), the hold icon notice is performed. There is a hold icon notice type. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), the game ball wins the first starting port 11 from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 29 (D)), and the special figure 1 is held. When this occurs, as in the case of FIG. 29E, the normal state hold icon HA4 is displayed in the above-described second area 50d2 (not shown) in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold.

  Then, immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 30 (B)) (hold icon notice is performed). In the example of FIG. 30, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in a normal mode for a moment immediately after display, but may be displayed in a special mode and the period displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

  As another hold icon notice type, there is a hold icon notice type that becomes a special mode when the hold icon moves, in other words, a hold icon change notice is performed when the special figure 1 hold is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), a game ball wins the first starting port 11 from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 29 (D)), and the special figure 1 is held. When this occurs, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the hold icon HA4 of the normal mode (white in FIG. 31 (B)) is displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) as described above in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the variation icon HA2 representing the special-figure variation display being executed until just before that is erased. Subsequently, when the special symbol variable display (special drawing variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold indicated by the hold icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 31 (D), it is displayed in the first area 50d1. The hold icon HA3 moves to the fluctuation display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31D) (the hold icon notice is performed). ).

  In addition, a plurality of special modes related to the hold icon notice can be provided so that the jackpot expectation varies depending on the type of special mode. For example, assume that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is a normal mode, and green, red, and gold are special modes. The jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the hold icon can be set to increase in the order of white <green <red <gold.

  The pre-reading effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. In addition, the pre-reading effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, and for example, an image other than the hold icon HA on the display unit 50a such as a background image, sound output from the speaker 52, light emission by the frame lamp 53, and panel movement It is possible to execute using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as an operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as an effect mode of the pre-reading effect, in addition to the effect mode that continues without interruption until it is displayed as a special icon change display after being executed, such as a hold icon change notice by the hold icon HA, the stop of the effect symbol You may make it the production | presentation aspect performed intermittently and continuously, such as every time a display is performed or the variation display of an effect design is started.

5. Game control by the game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the flowchart for controlling the game demonstrated below is an example. And about the some process in a flowchart, in the range which does not produce inconsistency in a process content, an execution order can be changed suitably or it can be performed in parallel.

  In addition, counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104. The initial value of the counter is “0”, the initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, and the initial value of the status is “1”.

  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 190 to the game control board 100, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the game control main process program shown in FIG.

  As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, the game control microcomputer 101 first disables interrupts (S1) and then sets access to the game RAM 104 to permit (S2). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a setting value setting operation for setting a setting value has been performed (S3). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the set value cylinder 70 is rotated from the reference state and the set value switch 71 is pressed. If it is determined that the setting value setting operation has not been performed, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S4. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the setting value setting operation has been performed, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S7 to set the setting value. After performing the setting process, the process proceeds to step S8. The set value setting process will be described later.

  In step S 4, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a setting process of the game RAM 104 that sets an initial value in a use area of the game RAM 104 that requires an initial value. In step S 5, a power recovery command is sent to the game RAM 104. In step S6, the set value indicated by the set value data stored in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is displayed on the set value display 87, and the set value is displayed in the output buffer. Proceed to S10.

  Further, in step S8, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the use area of the game RAM 104 and performs a setting process of the game RAM 104 that sets an initial value in the use area of the game RAM 104 that requires an initial value. In step S <b> 9, a RAM clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120.

  In step S10, the game control microcomputer 101 performs CTC activation setting processing for setting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit: circuit for managing interrupt time) to be used, and permits an interrupt in step S11.

  Subsequently, in step S12, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the counter values of various random numbers related to the common symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information are added and updated. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process is completed, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S13 whether or not the power is shut off. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an interruption detection signal is input from the interruption detection circuit of the power supply board 190. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power is not cut off, the process proceeds to step S12. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power is cut off, the interrupt is prohibited in step S14, the access to the game RAM 104 is prohibited in step S15, and the data stored in the game RAM 104 is stored. Is stored as backup data, and waits for the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to be cut off.

[Setting value setting processing]
Next, the setting value setting process (S7) will be described with reference to FIG. In the setting value setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 101 first stores the setting value data backed up in the gaming RAM 104 in the setting value storage unit 107 in step S51, and sets the setting value indicated by the setting value data. The value is displayed on the value display 87 (S51).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the set value switch 71 has been operated in step S52. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the setting value switch 71 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S55. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the setting value switch 71 has been operated, the setting value storage unit of the gaming RAM 104 is determined in step S53. The set value indicated by the set value data stored in 107 is increased by “1” to set a new set value, and the new set value is displayed on the set value display 87 in step S54.

  In the basic embodiment, the setting value is set in six stages of 1 to 6. When the setting value switch 71 is operated when the setting value is “6”, the setting value “1” is newly set. Will be. The mode of change of the set value by the operation of the set value switch 71 is not limited to “1” increase, but may be “1” decrease or random change.

  In step S55, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not there has been an operation for confirming the set value for confirming the set value. Specifically, based on the set value cylinder sensor 70a, the game control microcomputer 101 indicates that the set value cylinder 70 has been turned off, that is, whether the set value cylinder 70 has been rotated from the set state and returned to the basic state. Determine whether or not. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is no operation for confirming the set value, the process proceeds to step S52. If it is determined that there is an operation for confirming the set value, it is stored in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 in step S56. A set value specifying command indicating the set value indicated by the set value data is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120, the set value setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the game control main process.

  It should be noted that the setting value setting process is completed and the setting value is confirmed by performing a rotation operation for shifting the setting value cylinder 70 according to step S55 from the setting state to the reference state. It can be positioned as an operation for On the other hand, the rotation operation for setting the set value cylinder 70 according to step S3 from the reference state to the set state can be positioned as an operation for setting the set value. In the following, the former operation is referred to as “setting value determining operation” of the setting value cylinder 70, and the latter operation is referred to as “setting value setting operation” of the setting value cylinder 70.

[Game control timer interrupt processing]
Next, game control side timer interruption processing will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the game control board 100, so that the game control side timer interrupt shown in FIG. Execute the process.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 101 first executes an output process (S101) in the game control side timer interrupt process. In the output process, a command or the like set in an output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below is output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

  In the input process (S102) performed after the output process, the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and stores it in the game RAM 104 as the lower plate full data. Store in output buffer.

  The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the game control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general figure related determination information and the special figure related determination information includes the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process and the other period (after the end of the game control side timer interrupt process) And the period until the next game control timer interruption process is started).

  Subsequent to the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), subsequently performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). The sensor detection process, the normal operation process, and the special operation process will be described later.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107) and ends the game control timer interrupt processing. As other processing, a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104 is updated. As other processing, payout control processing for paying out a prize ball to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the winning ball counter for the first starting port 11, the winning ball counter for the second starting port 12, the winning ball counter for the large winning port 14, and the winning ball counter for the general winning port 10 are " It is checked whether or not “0” is exceeded. If it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when a prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process for subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S13 to S14 of the game control main process until the next interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102, and when the clock pulse is input, the game control is performed again. Side timer interrupt processing is executed. The game control microcomputer 101 outputs the command set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control timer interrupt process in the output process (S101) of the game control timer interrupt process executed again. .

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the general prize opening 10, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the general prize opening sensor 10a (S201). If no game ball has been won in the general winning opening 10 (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S203. If a game ball has been won in the general winning opening 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the game. A general winning opening prize ball process for paying out a prize ball is performed (S202). In the general winning opening prize ball processing, the number of winning balls (for example, “3”) corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening 10 is added to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening 10.

  In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), it is determined whether or not the normal operation status described later is 1, in other words, whether or not the normal variable display or the auxiliary game is performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process proceeds to step S207. If the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) The normal symbol random number indicated by the symbol is acquired as the general symbol related determination information (S205), and the acquired general symbol related determination information is stored in the general symbol hold storage unit 86 provided in the game RAM 104 (S206), and step S207. Proceed to

  In step S207, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the second start port 12, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start port sensor 12a. If no game ball has been won at the second starting port 12 (NO at S207), the process proceeds to step S214. If a game ball has won at the second starting port 12 (YES at S207), the game ball has a predetermined value. Second start opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second starting opening prize ball processing, the number of winning balls (for example, “4”) corresponding to the winning at the second starting opening 12 is added to the winning ball counter for the second starting opening 12.

  Next, the special figure 2 holding number (specifically, the value of the special figure 2 holding number provided in the gaming RAM 104 (the special figure 2 holding number counter)) is equal to or greater than “4” (upper limit storage number). It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the special figure 2 hold number is “4” or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the special figure 2 hold number is not “4” or more (less than “4”) ( NO in S209), special figure 2 retention number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 hold number addition process, the special figure 2 hold number counter is incremented by "1", and the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is increased by "1".

  Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP) ) And is stored in a special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S211).

  Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second prefetch determination process, the second start winning command is identified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second prefetch determination table shown in FIG. The second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 storage unit 105b (S213).

  Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 11, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 11a. If a game ball has not won the first start port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221. If a game ball has won the first start port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball is given a predetermined value. First start opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first starting opening prize ball processing, the number of winning balls (for example, “4”) corresponding to the winning at the first starting opening 11 is added to the winning ball counter for the first starting opening 11.

  Next, the number of special figure 1 hold (specifically, the value of the counter (special figure 1 hold number counter) for counting the number of special figure 1 hold provided in the gaming RAM 104) is “4” (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not (S216). If the special figure 1 hold number is “4” or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221. If the special figure 1 hold number is not “4” or more (less than), the process proceeds to NO in S216. ), Special figure 1 holding number addition processing is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 hold number addition process, the special figure 1 hold number counter is incremented by "1", and the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a is increased by "1".

  Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP) ) And is stored in a special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S218).

  Next, a first prefetch determination process is performed (S219). In the first prefetch determination process, the first start winning command is identified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first prefetch determination table shown in FIG. The first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 hold number in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a (S220).

  In step S221, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in the big prize opening 14, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the big prize port sensor 14a. If no game ball has been won in the big prize opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated. If a game ball has won in the big prize opening 14 (YES in S221), the game RAM 104 is loaded. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided big prize opening winning counter is “9” or more (S222). The grand prize winning prize counter is a counter for counting the number of winning prizes in the big prize winning opening 14 in one round game of the jackpot game. The grand prize winning counter is cleared at the end of each round game. In the basic embodiment, the prescribed number of winnings is set to “8”. Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

  If the counter value of the big prize winning prize counter is “9” or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated, and the counter value of the big prize winning prize counter is not “9” or more, that is, less than “9”. If this is the case (NO in S222), the counter value of the big prize opening prize counter is incremented by "1" (S223), and the big prize opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), And ends the sensor detection process. In the special winning opening prize ball processing, the number of winning balls (for example, “14”) corresponding to winning in the special winning opening 14 is added to the winning ball counter for the special winning opening 14.

  A sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided as a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, and processing other than the processing shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 is performed based on the detection of the game ball by the sensor. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, a normal operation process related to the control of the general map display 82 and the electric Chu 12D will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing related to the general-purpose display 82 and the electric Chu 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). “Normal operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each status. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the “normal operation status” (S1101). When the “normal operation status” is “1”, the normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed. When the “normal operation status” is “2”, the normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed. When the “normal operation status” is “3”, a normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “4”, an auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. The “normal operation status” is set to “1” by default.

  The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the general symbol hold storage unit 86. Further, a general-purpose variation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state, and a general-purpose variation pattern is determined. The normal operation status is changed to “2”. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a general figure change start command corresponding to the normal figure change pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal figure change display.

  The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal symbol fluctuation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display of the currently executed normal figure (whether or not to end the fluctuation display of the normal figure). If it is determined that the diagram change time has elapsed, the normal stop display is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to “3”. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a general figure change stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal figure change display.

  The normal symbol determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol determination process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the currently executed normal diagram has started (whether to stop the stop display of the normal diagram) If it is determined that a predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol displayed in a stopped state is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped symbol is a lost symbol), the normal operation status is changed to “1”. On the other hand, if the winning symbol is stopped, the normal operation status is changed to “4” and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

  The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process performed when an auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. When the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to “1”.

[Special action processing]
Next, a special operation process related to the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the special prize device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing related to the special figure display device 81, the special figure hold display device 83, and the special winning device 14D is divided into six statuses (stages). “Special operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each status. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the “special operation status” (S1501).

  The game control microcomputer 101 performs a special symbol standby process (S1502) when the “special operation status” is “1”, and changes the special symbol when the “special operation status” is “2”. The process (S1503) is performed. When the “special action status” is “3”, the special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is performed. When the “special action status” is “4”, the big hit game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and when the “special operation status” is “5”, gaming state setting processing (S1506) is performed. The “special operation status” is set to “1” by default.

  The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process that is performed while the special symbol is variably displayed and the jackpot game is not being performed. The special symbol standby process will be described in detail later.

  The special symbol variation processing (S1503) is processing performed when the special symbol is variably displayed. The special symbol variation process will be described in detail later.

  The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol confirmation process will be described in detail later.

  The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table by performing a jackpot game control process. When the jackpot game ends, the special action status is changed to “5”. When each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. When all the round games are finished and ending is started, an ending command indicating an ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

  The game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting a game state to be controlled after the big hit game when the big hit game is finished. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a big hit game, the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. At this time, when the duration of the high probability state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the high probability state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “high probability prescribed number”) is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104. . Further, when controlling in the time-saving state after the big hit game, the time-saving flag is turned on in the time-saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time-saving state. At this time, if the duration of the short-time state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the termination condition in the time reduction state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “time reduction prescribed number”) is set in the time reduction remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating the game state after the big hit game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the game state setting process.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no storage of special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to winning at the second start port 12, the special figure It is determined whether or not the number of one hold is “0” (S1608). If the special figure 1 holding number is also “0” (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no storage of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning at the first start port 11, It is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished. If the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), a customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). Then, the customer waiting flag is turned on (S1620), and the special symbol waiting process is finished.

  Also, if the special figure 2 hold number is “0” but the special figure 1 hold number is not “0” (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start If there is one or more special figure 1 related determination information stored due to winning in the mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

  In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the special symbol random number stored first in the special figure 1 storage unit 105a is read out, and the jackpot determination table associated with the current set value is read out. Among these, based on the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or lose (a jackpot determination).

  Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type determination (jackpot symbol type determination) is performed based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table. Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the symbol design data indicating the loss is set in the special buffer, and the symbol designating command indicating the loss is set in the output buffer.

  Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the current non-short-time state is present (S1651). If it is a non-short-time state (YES in S1651), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time-short state is selected (S1652), and then the process proceeds to step S1654. After selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

  In step S 1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the jackpot determination result is “jackpot”. If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a big hit (YES in S1654), it is for the big hit symbol from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

  In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In reach determination, a reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is checked against a reach determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (non-short-time state / short-time state) to determine whether there is a reach or not.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is “with reach” (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for reach loss is selected from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). Then, the process proceeds to step S1660, and if the reach is not present (NO in S1656), the current special figure 1 holding number is confirmed, and in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. From FIG. 1, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the reachless losing according to the number of reserved special figures 1 is selected (S 1657), and the process proceeds to step S 1660.

  In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the special figure fluctuation pattern random number, and compares the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659. Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment which judges special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is performed. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 fluctuation start command indicating the decided special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and the special figure fluctuation corresponding to the decided special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

  The special operation timer is updated for 4 ms in other processes in the game control side timer interrupt process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start command to be set includes information on the type of special symbol (that is, special figure 1) and special figure fluctuation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610). Information on the result (information on the presence / absence of reach and information on the special figure fluctuation pattern including information on the special figure fluctuation time) is included.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 display 81a to start the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a by one to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. The special figure 1 reservation storage section shift processing for clearing the storage area corresponding to the first reservation in FIG. 1 (the storage area farthest from the read side) is performed (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 suspension is digested in the order of suspension.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 hold number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a by "1" (change) ( In step S1614, the special operation status is changed to “2” (S1615).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616). If it is ON (YES in S1616), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1617), and a special symbol standby process is performed. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is terminated without executing Step S1617.

  Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, one or more special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to winning at the second start port 12 is stored. In some cases, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) are basically the same as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610). .

  The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically the same except that the table used for jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table and the table used for jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since this is the same process as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), a description thereof will be omitted. Also, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) basically also includes the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (except for the fact that the table used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment is the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table). Since it is the same process as S1610), the description is omitted.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure fluctuation time determined according to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b by one to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b. The special storage area shift processing for clearing the storage area corresponding to the fourth storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is performed (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 suspension is digested in the order of suspension.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the special figure 2 hold number counter by “1” (S1606), and decreases the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b by “1” and changes it (S1607). ), The special operation status is changed to “2” (S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1616.

  As described above, in the basic embodiment, the special symbol variation display based on the special figure 1 hold is performed only when the special figure 2 hold is “0” (YES in S1601). That is, the special figure 2 suspension is executed in preference to the special figure 1 suspension. In the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 hold is more likely to win the jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the special figure 1 hold. It should be noted that the special figure 1 suspension may be executed in preference to the special figure 2 suspension. Further, the special figure 1 suspension and the special figure 2 suspension may be performed in the order in which the suspension occurs regardless of the type of the special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the special symbol variation display, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1701). If the special symbol variation display is not terminated (NO in S1701), the special symbol variation process is terminated and the special symbol variation display is terminated (YES in S1701), and the special symbol variation display is displayed on the special symbol display 81. And stop display of a special symbol corresponding to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or lost special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or S1609 (S1702).

  Subsequently, a special figure fixed time (for example, 0.8 seconds) set in advance is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the special symbol fluctuation display is ended is output to the buffer. (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol determination process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to stop the special symbol stop display, that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has passed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1751). If the special symbol stop display is not terminated (NO in S1751), the special symbol confirmation process is terminated and the special symbol stop display is terminated (YES in S1751), and the current normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF). It is determined whether or not (S1752).

  If the gaming control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the short time state (the short time flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time-short state (NO in S1753), the process proceeds to step S1757. If it is currently in the time-short state (YES in S1753), the remaining variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the time-short state is left. The value of the time remaining number counter for measuring the number of times (time remaining number of times) is decremented by “1” (S1754), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time period remaining number counter is “0” (S1755). If the value of the time-remaining remaining number counter (time-remaining remaining number) is not “0” (NO in S1755), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if the value of the time-remaining remaining number counter (time-remaining remaining number) is “0” (S1755). (YES), the time reduction state is changed to the non-time reduction state (the time reduction flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

  Next, the gaming control microcomputer 101 confirms the current gaming state, sets a gaming state command indicating the gaming state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. Is determined (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), the special action status is changed to “1” (S1762), the special symbol determination process is completed, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), the gaming state is reset ( The normal gaming state is set, specifically, the high probability flag and the short time flag are turned OFF, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the short time remaining number counter are set to “0”) (S1759).

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs jackpot game preparation processing (S1760), changes the special operation status to “4” (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination processing. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the jackpot game preparation process. Also, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening according to the jackpot symbol being stopped is being performed is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (a jackpot game starts depending on the type of jackpot symbol) The time until the start of one round is set in the special operation timer. Furthermore, an opening command indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 according to the type of jackpot symbol. The opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol represents that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) according to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped is started.

6). Production control by production control board 120 [production control main processing]
Next, production control by the production control board 120 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the flowchart for controlling the production described below is an example. And about the some process in a flowchart, in the range which does not produce inconsistency in a process content, an execution order can be changed suitably or it can be performed in parallel.

  In addition, a counter, a timer, a flag, a buffer, and the like that appear in the following description of the effect control by the effect control board 120 are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the effect control board 120 reads out and executes the program for the sub control main process shown in FIG. 43 from the effect ROM 123.

  As shown in the figure, in the production control main process, first, a power-on process corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, setting of the CPU 122 for production, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are performed.

  Next, interruption is prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various effects are updated. The effect determination random numbers include various random numbers for determining the contents of effects such as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, which will be described later, and a special figure variation effect pattern determination random number.

  As an example, the determination random number counter update method for various effects can be the same as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above. Random values may not be added one by one at the time of update, but may be added two by two. The same applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

  When the random number seed update process ends, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 (for example, a special drawing change effect start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start, which will be described later) Command and an ending effect start command) are transmitted to the image control board 140.

  The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a in accordance with the received command (executes various effects based on the image). Further, the effect control board 120 outputs various sounds produced by the image control board 140 together with the sound output from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various effects by sound), or the sub drive board. The frame lamp 53 is caused to emit light via 162 (perform various effects by light emission), or the panel movable body 55k is actuated (perform various effects by operation). The various effects include special figure fluctuation effects, jackpot game effects (jackpot opening effects, round effects, jackpot ending effects), customer waiting effects, operation effects, prefetch effects, and the like.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 121 permits interruption (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) will be described later.

  The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 are input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 1 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 1 msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 first performs an input process (S4101) in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

  Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 generates the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing suitable for the effect by the image. Is output to the sub drive board 162. That is, the production control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the production control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the movable board 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

  The effect control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer (S4104), and ends the 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. In the 10 ms timer interruption process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first performs a reception command analysis process for analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described in detail in the first embodiment described later.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs voice control processing (S4202). In the voice control process, the creation of voice data (data for controlling the output of voice from the speaker 52) and the voice control circuit 161 are created based on the contents of the presentation indicated by the special figure variation presentation data set in the presentation RAM 124. Is output.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data creation processing (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the contents of effects indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. In the reception command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 121 first receives a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) from the game control board 100, in other words, receives the start winning command. It is determined whether it is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the start control command 121 is received (YES in S4301), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4302, while if the start control command is not received (NO in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4303.

  In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a start winning process according to the winning of a game ball in the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. In the start winning process, the received start winning command is stored in the start winning command holding storage unit 125 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute a prefetch effect indicating the degree of jackpot expectation. As the pre-reading effect, there is a continuous notice effect that is performed over a continuous display of a special symbol multiple times in addition to the hold icon notice that displays the hold icon in a special manner. When it is determined to execute these prefetch effects, a prefetch effect start command for executing the determined effects is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

  When the prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and a pre-reading effect by the image is performed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the image prefetch effect is performed by the image control board 140. Sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (execution of prefetching by sound is executed), and the frame lamp 53 is emitted via the sub-drive substrate 162 (execution of prefetching by light emission is executed), thereby moving the panel. It is possible to operate 55k (execute a pre-reading effect by the operation).

  In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether a symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the design control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305. If the symbol designation command has been received (YES in S4303), the symbol designation command is sent to the effect RAM 124. Is stored in the symbol designation command storage unit 126 (S4304).

  In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether a special figure change start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure change start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure change start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4307. If the special figure change start command has been received (YES in S4305), the contents of the special figure change effect are determined. Then, a special figure fluctuation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure fluctuation effect is performed.

  In the special figure change effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure change start command in the special figure change start command storage unit 127 in the effect RAM 124. Then, based on the contents of the stop special symbol (the type of jackpot symbol, the loss special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed To EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are selected. A stop symbol pattern determination table for performing stop symbol determination is selected. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the special symbol and the special symbol variation pattern. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special symbol and the special symbol fluctuation pattern. Each stop symbol pattern determination table includes a plurality of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 so that stop symbol pattern determination random numbers (stop symbol pattern determination) have a predetermined distribution ratio (%). Value). Next, the production control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

  In the stop symbol pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 compares the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random numbers with the selected stop symbol pattern table and determines the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped. Then, the data representing the determined effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the special figure fluctuation pattern is a reach-less loss fluctuation, a combination of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to be a so-called “break”. Also, if the special figure variation pattern is a loss-with-reach variation, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are the same, and the medium effect symbol EZ2 is different from them, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the small symbol KZ1. A combination of KZ3 is selected. Further, if the special figure variation pattern is a big hit fluctuation, a combination of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to be a so-called “sloppy” according to the type of the production mode and the big hit symbol. .

  Next, the production control microcomputer 121 creates a special figure fluctuation production pattern in which the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production are associated with each other based on the special production mode and the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. A special figure variation effect pattern determination table for performing determination of the special figure variation effect pattern determination is selected. A plurality of special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each special figure variation effect pattern determination table, a random value for determining a special figure variation effect pattern (one special figure variation effect pattern) is added to one or more special figure variation effect patterns so that a predetermined distribution ratio (%) is obtained. Judgment value). Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination random number counter as a special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination random number, and displays the special figure based on the acquired special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination random number. Fluctuation effect pattern determination is performed.

  In the special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 compares the acquired special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination random number with the selected special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination table to determine the special figure fluctuation effect pattern. The data representing the special figure variation effect pattern is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and a special figure variation effect start command indicating the special figure variation effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

  When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined value from the image ROM 142. The effect image is read out, and the special drawing variation effect is performed by the image on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50.

  In addition, in the special figure change effect start command, in addition to the special figure change effect by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure change effect by the sound output from the speaker 52 and the special light change effect by the frame lamp 53 are used. The contents of the effect of the figure change effect and the effect of the effect of the special figure change effect by the operation performed by the movable board 55k are included.

  The effect control microcomputer 121 also displays the special figure variation effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the special figure change effect by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed. Accordingly, sound is output from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (execution of special figure variation effect by sound is performed), and the frame lamp 53 is caused to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (special figure due to light emission). The fluctuation effect is executed) and the movable board body 55k is operated (the special figure fluctuation effect by the action is executed).

  In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether a special figure fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special effect fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4307), the production control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4309. If the special effect fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4307), the special figure change is performed. A special figure change effect end process (S4308) for ending the effect (stopping the change display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and performing the stop display) is performed.

  The special effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure change stop command in the special figure change effect end process, and appropriately ends the special figure change effect based on the analysis result (the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbol KZ1). A special figure change effect end command for stopping the change display of .about.KZ3) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the special figure variation effect end command, the image control board 140 ends the executing special figure variation effect (stops the changing effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

  In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a gaming state command has been received from the gaming control board 100, in other words, whether or not the gaming state command has been stored in the reception buffer. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4311 if it has not received a gaming state command (NO in S4309), and analyzes the gaming state command if it has received a gaming state command (YES in S4309). Then, the gaming state represented by the gaming state command is specified, and a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state is performed (S4310).

  In the game state setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is the normal gaming state, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag “00H” in the gaming state flag area of the rendering RAM 124. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “01H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the high probability high base game state. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “02H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the low probability high base game state.

  In step S4311, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether a customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 does not receive the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313. If the customer waiting command is received (YES in S4311), the production waiting control standby process is performed. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

  The production control microcomputer 121 waits for a waiting time (customer waiting production waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from when the presentation symbol is stopped to the start of the customer waiting production in the customer waiting production waiting process. Set to timer. The effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has elapsed. If it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, the effect waiting RAM 124 generates a customer waiting effect start command for starting the customer waiting effect. Set to the output buffer.

  In step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether an opening command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the opening command is stored in the reception buffer. If the presentation control microcomputer 121 does not receive the opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315. If the opening command is received (YES in S4313), the jackpot associated with the start of the opening of the jackpot game An opening effect start process is performed (S4314).

  In the jackpot opening effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening effect corresponding to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed based on the analysis result. If it is executed, the effect content of the jackpot opening effect (a jackpot opening effect pattern) is selected, and a jackpot opening effect start command for starting the jackpot opening effect with the selected jackpot opening effect pattern is output from the effect RAM 124. Set to buffer.

  In step S4315, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether a round number designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the round number designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317. On the other hand, if the round number designation command has been received (YES in S4315), a round effect start process associated with the start of the round game is performed. (S4316).

  In the round production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command to determine whether or not to execute the round production according to the round game to be started. The effect content (round effect pattern) is selected, and a round effect start command corresponding to the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

  In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether an ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the process proceeds to step S4320, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending effect start process accompanying the start of the jackpot game ending (S4318) And the effect mode setting process (S4319).

  In the jackpot ending effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect corresponding to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed, and executes it. The effect content of the jackpot ending effect (a jackpot ending effect pattern) is selected, and a jackpot ending effect start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

  In addition, in the effect mode setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode after the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command (the effect mode is set to the effect mode). Process for control).

  For example, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or jackpot symbol D, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the probability variation mode that suggests a high probability high base gaming state. Then, an effect mode flag indicating the probability change effect mode is turned ON in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and a probability change effect mode start command indicating that the probability change effect mode is set is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the probability changing effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. Then, the probability change background image G120 is displayed as the background image, and the probability change BGM is output as the BGM.

  Further, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, jackpot symbol E, or jackpot symbol F, the effect control microcomputer 121 has a high probability high base gaming state or a low probability high base. A short-time effect mode is set in which it is difficult or impossible to determine which of the gaming states. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on the effect mode flag indicating the time effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and outputs a time effect effect mode start command indicating that the time effect effect mode is set to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Set to. When the short-time effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. The time-shortening background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-shortening BGM is output as the BGM.

  In step S4320, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a setting value designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the setting value designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the set value designation command (NO in S4320), it ends the received command analysis process, while if it has received the set value designation command (YES in S4320), it designates the set value. A setting value setting process for storing a setting value flag indicating a setting value indicated by the command in the setting value flag storage unit 128 in the effect RAM 124 is performed (S4321), and the received command analysis process is ended.

<First Embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 executes a set value effect related to the set value based on the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6. In the first embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Moreover, the same code | symbol and term are used about the structure same as basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  As described in the basic embodiment, a sensor for detecting a game ball won in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 such as the first starting port sensor 11a or the second starting port sensor 12a is provided. ing. In the first embodiment, in addition to sensors that detect winning game balls such as these sensors, as shown in FIG. 48, game balls that are discharged outside the game area 6 after entering the game area 6 are displayed. An out sensor 19a for detection is provided.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 14, and a gaming ball that has entered the out opening 19, The spheres are collected in one path (not shown) that can flow down. An out sensor 19a for detecting a game ball is provided on this route. In the following, a game ball that is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6 is referred to as an “out ball”.

  As the out sensor 19a is provided, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred in the sensor detection process of step S104. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, after step S224 of the sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has been generated in step S225, in other words, whether the out sensor 19a has detected a game ball. Determine whether or not. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that no out ball has been generated (NO in S225), the sensor detection process is terminated. If it is determined that an out ball has been generated, it is determined in step S226 that an out ball has been generated. The out designation command shown is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the sensor detection process is completed. The game ball set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 is transmitted to the effect control board 120 by the output process in step S107.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 121 counts the number of generated out spheres based on the received out sphere command. If the jackpot is won after the number of out balls reaches 50,000, the effect control microcomputer 121 may execute a set value effect suggesting a set value in the jackpot opening effect related to the jackpot. For example, in the set value effect, as shown in FIG. 50, the number of fireworks images G20 corresponding to the set value is displayed. That is, the number of displayed fireworks images G20 suggests a set value.

  If the set value “1” is set, one firework image G20 is displayed in addition to the jackpot opening effect where the set value effect is not performed (see FIG. 50A). Similarly, if the set value “2” to the set value “6” are set, 2 to 6 fireworks images G20 are displayed in addition to the jackpot opening effect where the set value effect is not performed (FIG. 50). (See (B) to FIG. 50 (F)).

  The processing for performing the set value effect of the first embodiment can be set as appropriate. For example, an out-sphere counter that counts out balls is provided in the effect RAM 124. Then, after the step S4321 of the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an out-sphere command has been received. If it is determined that it has been received, the out-sphere counter is incremented by “1”. Perform the process. Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the counter value of the out ball counter is 50000, that is, whether or not 50000 out balls have been generated, and the counter value of the out ball counter is 50000. When it is determined that there is a set value effect flag for performing the set value effect, a process of setting in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 is performed.

  Then, in the opening effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the presence / absence of the set value effect flag. If the set value effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the set value effect according to the set value indicated by the set value flag. In order for the image control board 140 to execute, a set value effect start command corresponding to the set value is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set value effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process in step S4004. Then, the image control board 140 appropriately displays the number of fireworks images G20 corresponding to the set values in the jackpot opening effect based on the received set value effect start command.

  As described above, the set value effect is executed based on the number of out balls, so that the game balls that have been launched but have entered the out port 19 are not wasted. It is possible to improve the occupancy rate by preventing the decline of the game and to improve the game entertainment. Furthermore, since winning the jackpot is also included in the conditions for executing the set value effect, the player's motivation for the jackpot winning can be maintained.

(Modification of the first embodiment)
The number of out spheres constituting the execution condition of the set value effect is not limited to 50000, and may be set as appropriate. Further, the number of out spheres (hereinafter referred to as “out sphere determination value”) for executing the set value effect is not limited to one, and a plurality of out spheres may be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 51, an out ball determination value may be associated with a set value. As shown in FIG. 51, the out ball determination value may increase as the set value increases. In this way, for example, when the jackpot game is performed when the number of out balls is less than 34,000, but the set value effect is not executed, at least the set value “1” that is most unfavorable to the player is not Can be confirmed, so that the player can feel secure.

  In addition, the out-sphere determination values constituting the execution condition of the set value effect are set to 40000 pieces and 60000 pieces. Then, when the number of out balls reaches 40000 and wins a big hit, the setting value is either 1 to 3 or 4 to 6, in other words, suggesting whether the value is relatively low or high. 1 Set value effect is performed. In this case, there are two types of effects of the first set value effect. If the effect is one effect, the set value is a relatively low value of 1 to 3, and if the effect is the other effect, the set value is It is a relatively high value of 4-6. Next, when the out ball determination value reaches 60,000 and a big win is won, a second set value effect is performed that suggests that the set value is either 1 to 3 or 4 to 6. In this case, there are three types of effects for the second set value effect. If the effect is a certain effect, the set value is either 1 or 4. If the effect is another effect, the set value is 2 or 5. As long as it is a remaining production mode, the set value may be either 3 or 6. In this way, the set value may be suggested step by step by executing the set value effect.

  Furthermore, although the set value effect is executed as a jackpot opening effect, the effect time of the set value effect is not limited to the jackpot opening effect, and may be a round effect or a jackpot ending effect. In addition, the set value effect can be executed in the jackpot opening effect of any jackpot game, but only in a specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game with a relatively large number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base game state, for example. The set value effect may be executed. Conversely, the set value effect may be configured to be executed only in a specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game with a relatively small number of rounds or a jackpot game with a low probability high base game state.

  Also, two types of out sphere determination values that are threshold values for executing the set value effect may be provided, and the type of jackpot that is a condition for executing the set value effect may be varied depending on the out sphere determination value. Set based on winning a specific jackpot related to a specific jackpot game, such as a jackpot game with a relatively large number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base game state after the number of out balls reaches 30000 Enable value production. On the other hand, after the number of out balls has reached 60000, winning a non-specific jackpot related to a non-specific jackpot game, such as a jackpot game with a relatively small number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base game state Based on, the set value effect can be executed. Note that the size of the number of out spheres, which is a threshold for executing the set value effect, and the type of jackpot for executing the set value effect may be interchanged.

  Furthermore, the set value effect is executed in the jackpot game when the number of out balls reaches the out ball determination value, and when the jackpot is won, the set value effect is executed with the special figure variation effect related to the jackpot winning. Also good. In this case, the execution time of the set value effect is not limited, but at a specific time such as the start of the special figure change effect, the reach establishment, the development to the SP reach effect, or the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. May be set.

  In addition, the set value effect is not limited to the jackpot determination result, but after the number of out balls reaches the out ball determination value, a specific effect such as SP reach or a specific SP reach indicating that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high. It may be executed by executing. In this case, for example, when a specific SP reach having a relatively high jackpot expectation is executed in the SP reach after the number of out balls reaches the out ball determination value, the set value is set in the specific SP reach. Production may be performed.

  In addition, the set value effect suggests a set value based on the number of fireworks images G20, but the effect mode suggesting the set value is not limited to the number of firework images G20, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the set value effect may suggest the set value by other effect modes such as the size and color of the firework image G20. Further, the set value effect may be executed by using other effect devices such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the panel movable device 55 instead of or in addition to the image display device 50. .

  Furthermore, six types of effect modes are set in the set value effect, and each effect mode and the set value are associated with each other in a one-to-one manner, but a plurality of set values are associated with one effect mode. May be. For example, there are three types of production modes, and the first production mode is associated with the setting value “1” and the setting value “2”, and the second production mode is set with the setting value “3” and the setting value “3”. 4 ”may be associated, and the third rendering mode may be associated with the setting value“ 5 ”and the setting value“ 6 ”. In addition, a setting value “1” and a setting value “6” are associated with the first effect form, and a setting value “2” and a setting value “5” are associated with the second effect aspect, A setting value “3” and a setting value “4” may be associated with the third effect mode.

  Alternatively, there are six types of production modes, and all the setting values are associated with each production mode, but the possibility of the set values set according to the production modes may be different. For example, the first to sixth effect modes are set as the effect mode of the set value effect, and set value “1”> set value “2”> set value “3”> set value “4”> set There is a high possibility that the set value effect of the first effect mode is executed in the order of the value “5”> the set value “6”, and the set value “6”> the set value “5”> the set value “4”> the set value. You may comprise so that possibility that the setting value effect of a 6th effect aspect will be performed in order of value "3"> setting value "2"> setting value "1".

  Further, the set value effect may be executed in a form incorporated in the jackpot opening effect or the SP reach effect instead of being executed in a form independent of the jackpot opening effect or the SP reach effect. For example, a setting value effect that suggests a setting value may be executed according to the color, size, display position, or the like of the opening image G1 or the right-handed image G2, or the type of character that appears.

  In addition, a sensor that detects only a game ball that has entered the out port 19 without detecting a game ball that has won the first start port 11 or the like is provided, and based on the number of game balls that have entered the out port 19. The set value effect may be executed in the same manner as the set value effect described above.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. Also in the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 executes a set value effect related to the set value based on the game ball discharged to the outside of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6. In the second embodiment, differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described. Moreover, the same code | symbol and term are used about the structure same as basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  Also in the second embodiment, an out sensor 19a is provided as in the first embodiment. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred in the sensor detection process. If it is determined that an out ball has occurred, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an out designation command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 101 uses a general winning opening prize ball process (S202) of the sensor detection process to input an ordinary winning opening prize command indicating that a gaming ball has won the general winning opening 10 to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. set. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 receives a prize winning command indicating that a game ball has won the prize winning opening 14 in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the prize winning prize ball processing (S224) of the sensor detection process. set.

  Here, the game ball that has entered the game area 6 enters any of the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, or the out opening 19, and the gaming area 6 Therefore, the number of out balls can be said to be the number of game balls that have been successfully launched and have entered the game area 6. Therefore, the number of out balls can be regarded as the number of game balls that have been launched. Hereinafter, the number of game balls successfully fired is also referred to as “number of fired balls”.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 121 counts the number of differences, which is the difference between the number of shot balls and the acquired number of prize balls. The number of winning balls acquired is the number of winning balls acquired by entering the general winning port 10, the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, and the big winning port 14. Although the number of winning balls by winning can be set as appropriate, in the above example, when a gaming ball enters the general winning opening 10, three gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. Similarly, when a game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, when game balls enter the big winning opening 14, 14 game balls are paid out as prize balls. The number of shot balls is expressed as a negative value, and the number of prize balls is expressed as a positive value. Then, for example, 12,000 game balls are fired, three are entered into the general winning opening 10, 150 are entered into the first starting opening 11, five are entered into the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening It is assumed that 45 balls have entered 14. In this case, the difference number is (3 × 3) + (4 × 150) + (4 × 5) + (14 × 45) −12000 = −10741.

  Furthermore, when the difference number reaches −20000, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the set value effect. Unlike the first embodiment, the set value effect can be executed at any time of a special figure variation effect, a jackpot game effect, or a demonstration effect. In the set value effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, a small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at a height corresponding to the set value. That is, the height at which the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed suggests a set value. Specifically, the position where the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed increases as the set value increases.

  For example, when the special figure variation effect is being performed and the number of differences reaches −20000, if the set value “1” is set, the small unmanned aircraft image is set at the lowest height among the set values. G21 appears at the right end of the display unit 50a so as to cross the display unit 50a from right to left, moves toward the left, and disappears from the left end. (See FIG. 52A). Similarly, if the set value “6” is set, the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at the highest height among the set values (see FIG. 52F). If the set value “2” to the set value “5” are set, the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at a height corresponding to the set value (see FIGS. 52B to 52E). ).

  The processing for performing the set value effect of the second embodiment can be set as appropriate. For example, the effect RAM 124 is provided with a difference number counter for counting the difference number. In the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an out-sphere command has been received, and when determining that it has received, performs a process of subtracting “1” from the difference number counter. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the general winning award winning command is received in the received command analysis process, and if it is determined that the received command is received, the difference counter is incremented by “3”. Do. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a big prize winning command is received in the received command analysis process, and if it is determined that it is received, a process of adding “14” to the difference number counter. Do. In addition, when it is determined in step S4301 of the received command analysis process that the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command, for example, after the start winning process, the difference counter is incremented by “4”. Process.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a set value effect determination process, for example, after step S4203 of the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012). In the set value effect determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first performs a process of determining whether or not the counter value of the difference number counter is −20000, that is, whether or not the difference number has reached −20000. . Subsequently, when the microcomputer for effect control 121 determines that the counter value of the difference counter is −20000, in order to cause the image control board 140 to execute the set value effect corresponding to the set value indicated by the set value flag, A set value effect start command corresponding to the set value is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set value effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process in step S4004. Then, the image control board 140 appropriately displays the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 at a height corresponding to the set value based on the received set value effect start command.

  As described above, since the set value effect is executed based on the difference number in which the out ball is reflected, the game ball that has been launched but has entered the out port 19 is not wasted. It is possible to improve the operation rate by preventing the player's gaming motivation from decreasing, and to improve the gaming interest.

(Modification of the second embodiment)
Note that the number of differences constituting the execution condition of the set value effect is not limited to −20000, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the number of differences for executing the set value effect (hereinafter referred to as “difference number determination value”) is not limited to one, and a plurality of differences may be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the difference value determination value may be associated with the set value. As shown in FIG. 53, the difference number determination value may be lowered as the set value is increased. In this way, for example, when the difference number reaches −12000, but the set value effect is not executed, it is determined that at least the set value “1” that is most unfavorable to the player is determined. Can give you a sense of security. An increase in the number of differences is a difficult situation for the player, but since the setting value is higher as the situation becomes longer, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Also, the difference number judgment value is set to -15000 and -30000. When the difference number reaches −15000, the first set value effect suggesting whether the set value is any of 1 to 3 or 4 to 6, in other words, a relatively low value or a high value. Do. In this case, there are two types of effects of the first set value effect. If the effect is one effect, the set value is a relatively low value of 1 to 3, and if the effect is the other effect, the set value is It is a relatively high value of 4-6. Next, when the number of differences reaches −30000, a second set value effect that suggests any one of the set values 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 is performed. In this case, there are three types of effects for the second set value effect. If the effect is a certain effect, the set value is either 1 or 4. If the effect is another effect, the set value is 2 or 5. As long as it is a remaining production mode, the set value may be either 3 or 6. In this way, the set value may be suggested step by step by executing the set value effect.

  Furthermore, the set value effect suggests a set value depending on the display position of the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21. However, the effect mode suggesting the set value is not limited to the display position of the small unmanned aircraft image G21. Also good. For example, the set value effect may suggest the set value according to other effect modes such as the size, color, moving speed, or number of the small unmanned aircraft image G21. Further, the set value effect may be executed by using other effect devices such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the panel movable device 55 instead of or in addition to the image display device 50. .

  In addition, six types of effect modes are set in the set value effect, and each effect mode and the set value are associated with each other in a one-to-one manner, but a plurality of set values are associated with one effect mode. May be. For example, there are three types of production modes, and the first production mode is associated with the setting value “1” and the setting value “2”, and the second production mode is set with the setting value “3” and the setting value “3”. 4 ”may be associated, and the third rendering mode may be associated with the setting value“ 5 ”and the setting value“ 6 ”. Furthermore, the setting value “1” and the setting value “6” are associated with the first effect form, and the setting value “2” and the setting value “5” are associated with the second effect form. A setting value “3” and a setting value “4” may be associated with the third effect mode.

  Alternatively, there are six types of production modes, and all the setting values are associated with each production mode, but the possibility of the set values set according to the production modes may be different. For example, the first to sixth effect modes are set as the effect mode of the set value effect, and set value “1”> set value “2”> set value “3”> set value “4”> set There is a high possibility that the set value effect of the first effect mode is executed in the order of the value “5”> the set value “6”, and the set value “6”> the set value “5”> the set value “4”> the set value. You may comprise so that possibility that the setting value effect of a 6th effect aspect will be performed in order of value "3"> setting value "2"> setting value "1".

  In addition, the number of differences, which is the execution condition of the set value effect, reflects the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening 14, but the difference number The types of prize balls to be reflected in the game may be limited to a part. For example, only the winning ball acquired by entering the big winning opening 14 may be reflected in the difference number which is the execution condition of the set value effect. Alternatively, only the winning balls acquired by entering the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, and the second starting opening 12 may be reflected in the difference number which is the execution condition of the set value effect.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the third embodiment can perform variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 with an image different from the basic embodiment described above. And the setting value effect which suggests a setting value is performed using the variable display of these effect symbols EZ1-EZ3. In the third embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Moreover, the same code | symbol and term are used about the structure same as basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  First, the effect symbols constituting the set value effect will be described. As shown in FIGS. 54 (A) to 54 (C), there are a first composite symbol G221, a second composite symbol G222, and a third composite symbol G223. The first composite symbol G221 is used for variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the first normal effect stage. Similarly, the second composite symbol G222 is used for variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the second normal effect stage. The third composite symbol G223 is used for variable display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the third normal effect stage. Hereinafter, the first composite symbol G221, the second composite symbol G222, and the third composite symbol G223 are collectively referred to as “composite symbol G22”.

  The first composite symbol G221 has a first lottery result suggesting part G221a for suggesting a special figure lottery result and a first set value suggesting part G221b for suggesting a set value. Similarly, the second composite symbol G222 has a second lottery result suggesting part G222a for suggesting a special figure lottery result and a second set value suggesting part G222b for suggesting a set value. Further, the third composite symbol G223 includes a third lottery result suggesting unit G223a for suggesting a special drawing lottery result and a third set value suggesting unit G223b for suggesting a set value.

  Hereinafter, the first lottery result suggesting unit G221a, the second lottery result suggesting unit G222a, and the third lottery result suggesting unit G223a are collectively referred to as “lottery result suggesting unit G22a”. Further, the first set value suggesting unit G221b, the second set value suggesting unit G222b, and the third set value suggesting unit G223b are collectively referred to as a “set value suggesting unit G22b”.

  The lottery result suggesting part G22a is the same as the effect symbol G10 used for variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the basic embodiment and the first to second embodiments. Therefore, it can be said that the composite symbol G22 is configured by adding the set value suggestion part G22b to the effect symbol G10 in the basic embodiment and the first embodiment to the second embodiment.

  The first lottery result suggesting part G221a is configured by an image in which numbers “1” to “9” are superimposed on a baseball, as in the basic embodiment. Similarly, the second lottery result suggesting portion G222a is configured by an image in which the numbers “1” to “9” are superimposed on the baseball glove. Further, the third lottery result suggesting portion G223a is configured by an image in which numbers “1” to “9” are superimposed on a baseball cap.

  Note that the number part of the first lottery result suggesting part G221a to the third lottery result suggesting part G223a shown in FIGS. 54 (A) to 54 (C) is “1”, which is “1”. The first lottery result suggesting part G221a to the third lottery result suggesting part G223a in a certain case are illustrated, and the number part composed of “2” to “9” is similar to the basic embodiment. The first lottery result suggesting portion G221a to the third lottery result suggesting portion G223a are also provided. Further, as in the case of the basic embodiment, the numbers “3” and “7” in the first lottery result suggesting part G221a to the third lottery result suggesting part G223a are configured in red, and the first lottery The other numerical parts of the result suggesting part G221a to the third lottery result suggesting part G223a are configured in blue.

  The first set value suggesting part G221b, the second set value suggesting part G222b, and the third set value suggesting part G223b are configured by the same image representing a shutter that can be opened and closed in the vertical direction. 54A to 54C show the first composite symbol G221 to the third composite symbol G223 in the state where the shutters of the first set value suggestion unit G221b to the third set value suggestion unit G223b are closed. Yes. Here, taking the first composite symbol G221 as an example, when the shutter of the first set value suggesting unit G221b is opened, the first set value suggesting unit G221b is set to any one of FIG. 54D to FIG. 54F. It becomes a state. Specifically, when the shutter of the first set value suggesting part G221b is opened, “◯” is displayed on the first set value suggesting part G221b (FIG. 54D), and “Δ” is displayed. And (x) are displayed (FIG. 54 (F)).

  It should be noted that “◯”, “Δ”, and “×” are also displayed in the second set value suggesting part G222b and the third set value suggesting part G223b, similarly to the first set value suggesting part G221b. In the following, “◯” displayed on the set value suggestion portion G22b is referred to as “first set value design G23a”, and “Δ” displayed on the set value suggestion portion G22b is referred to as “second set value design”. "G23b", and "x" displayed in the set value suggestion portion G22b is referred to as "third set value symbol G23c". Furthermore, the first set value symbol G23a to the third set value symbol G23c are collectively referred to as “set value symbol G23”.

  In addition, since the numbers displayed in the lottery result suggesting portion G22a constitute identification information for suggesting the special drawing lottery result, the numbers displayed in the lottery result suggesting portion G22a are referred to as “lottery result information”. That's it. In addition, “◯”, “Δ”, and “×” displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b constitute information for suggesting the set value, and therefore “◯” displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b. , “Δ”, and “×” are referred to as “set value information”.

  Regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22, the shutter of the set value suggestion portion G22b opens when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped. And when the shutter of setting value suggestion part G22b opens, a setting value is suggested by the combination of setting value symbol G23 displayed on each setting value suggestion part G22b of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3. That is, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the set value symbol G23 is displayed on each of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3.

  Regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22, any one of the first set value symbol G23a to the third set value symbol G23c can be displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b. Therefore, there are 27 types of combinations of set value symbols G23 which are the contents of the effect of the set value effect. Hereinafter, the combination of the set value symbol G23 is also referred to as a “set value symbol pattern”.

  In the third embodiment, the set value effect is executed in the same way every time the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22, that is, regardless of the type of the effect stage. The That is, the set value effect is executed in accordance with the special figure variation effect. The set value symbol pattern is selected every time the special figure variation effect is executed. Which set value symbol pattern is selected is determined based on the set value. And the selection rate with respect to each set value design pattern changes with set values. Since the selection rate for the set value symbol pattern differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested by the set value symbol pattern of the set value effect to be executed.

  FIG. 55 shows the selection rate for each set value symbol pattern for each set value. Here, the column “set value symbol combination” in FIG. 55 represents a combination of three set value symbols G23, and the left end is the set value symbol G23 displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b of the left effect symbol EZ1. The center represents the set value symbol G23 displayed on the set value suggesting portion G22b of the medium effect symbol EZ2, and the right end represents the set value symbol G23 displayed on the set value suggestion portion G22b of the right effect symbol EZ3. .

  The selection rate of the set value design pattern is set as appropriate. For example, when the combination of the set value design G23 is “◯, ○, ○”, the set value “6” = the set value “5”> the set value. There is a high probability that the set value symbol pattern 1 corresponding to the combination is selected in the order of “4” = set value “3”> set value “2” = set value “1”. That is, there is a high possibility that the set values are set in this order. Similarly, when the combination of the set value symbol G23 is “××××”, the set value “1” = the set value “2”> the set value “3” = the set value “4”> the set value “5”. There is a high probability that the set value symbol pattern 27 corresponding to the combination in the order of the set value “6” is selected. That is, there is a high possibility that the set values are set in this order. Further, when the combination of the set value symbol G23 is “Δ · Δ · Δ”, the set value “3” = the set value “4”> the set value “1” = the set value “2” = the set value “5” = There is a high probability that the set value symbol pattern 14 corresponding to the combination in the order of the set value “6” is selected. That is, there is a high possibility that the set values are set in this order.

  Here, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. Here, a specific example will be described in which the set value effect is executed in the special figure fluctuation effect of non-reach loss in the first normal effect stage. For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), after the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped. When the change of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is stopped and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the set value effect is executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 56 (C) to 56 (E), when the stop display of the effect diagram effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the shutter that has been closed by the set value suggestion unit G22b until then is shown. Is opened, and the set value symbol G23 is displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3.

  In FIG. 56, as the set value effect, the same set value symbol G23 is displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, but the set value suggestion part G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. In some cases, different kinds of set value symbols G23 may be displayed. Also, the same type of set value symbol G23 may be displayed in two of the set value suggestion portions G22b related to the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and different types of set value symbols G23 may be displayed in the remaining one. .

  Also, in FIG. 56, the set value effect is executed by the special figure variation effect of the reach-less loss, but the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are also stopped and displayed in the same manner in the case of the reach loss and the special figure variation effect of the big hit. At this time, a set value effect based on the set value that has been set is executed. Further, in FIG. 56, the set value effect is executed in the first normal effect stage. Similarly, when the stop symbols of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in the second normal effect stage and the third normal effect stage. The set value effect is executed based on the set value. However, in the second normal effect stage, variable display and set value effects of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 using the second composite symbol G222 are performed. In the case of the third normal effect stage, variable display and set value effects of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 using the third composite symbol G223 are performed.

  Next, based on FIG. 57, the process in which the production control microcomputer 121 determines a set value symbol pattern will be described. The set value symbol pattern is determined in the stop symbol pattern determination process in the special symbol fluctuation effect start process described above. That is, the stop symbol pattern determination process of the third embodiment is different from the stop symbol pattern determination process of the basic embodiment described above.

  In the stop symbol pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first shows the contents of the stop special symbol (big hit symbol type or loss special symbol) indicated by the stored symbol designation command and the special symbol variation start command as step S5001. Based on the special figure variation pattern, the lottery result information determination table for performing the lottery result information determination for determining which lottery result information is used to stop display the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the lottery result information determination table includes a lottery result information determination table used when the stop special symbol is a jackpot symbol A or a jackpot symbol D, the stop special symbol is a jackpot symbol B, a jackpot symbol C, Lottery result information determination table used for jackpot symbol E or jackpot symbol F, lottery result information determination table used when special figure variation pattern is lost with reach, and special figure variation pattern is loss without reach There is a lottery result information determination table used in

  A plurality of lottery result information determination tables are provided in association with special figures and special figure fluctuation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one lottery result information determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each lottery result information determination table, numbers to be displayed on the lottery result suggestion part G22a according to each of the design symbols EZ1 to EZ3 specifically representing the lottery result information so as to have the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. A lottery result information determination random number value (lottery result information determination value) is distributed. In addition, a stop symbol pattern is associated with each lottery result information as identification information for identifying the lottery result information.

  In step S5002, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the lottery result information determination random number counter as the lottery result information determination random number. In step S5003, the lottery result information determination random number is determined based on the acquired lottery result information determination random number. Make a decision. The random number counter for lottery result information determination is provided in the effect RAM 124 and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process in step S4003.

  In the lottery result information determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the selected lottery result information determination random number with the selected lottery result information determination table, and determines lottery result information related to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. . In step S5004, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets data representing the determined lottery result information in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. In the following, data representing the determined lottery result information is referred to as “lottery result information data”.

  Next, in step S5005, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a set value symbol pattern determination table based on the set value indicated by the set set value flag. As described above, the setting value symbol pattern determination table includes the setting value symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value is “1”, the setting value symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. A setting value symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value is “4”, a setting value symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value is “4”, a setting value symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value is “5”; There is a set value symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is “6”.

  A plurality of set value symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with set values. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one set value symbol pattern determination table associated with the set value. In each set value symbol pattern determination table, random values for set value symbol pattern determination (set value symbol pattern determination values) are distributed to the preset value symbol pattern so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 55 is obtained. Yes.

  In step S5006, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the set value symbol pattern determination random number counter as the set value symbol pattern determination random number, and in step S5007, based on the acquired set value symbol pattern determination random number. Set value symbol pattern determination is performed. The set value symbol pattern determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124 and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process in step S4003.

  In the setting value symbol pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 compares the acquired setting value symbol pattern determination random number with the selected setting value symbol pattern determination table to determine the setting value symbol pattern. In step S5008, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets data representing the determined set value symbol pattern in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. In the following, data representing the determined set value symbol pattern is referred to as “set value symbol pattern data”.

  Finally, in step S5009, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets an effect symbol command indicating the lottery result information pattern and the set value symbol pattern in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and finishes the stop symbol pattern determination process.

  When the effect symbol command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined effect image from the image ROM 142. Is displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed by the lottery result information pattern indicated by the effect symbol command and the set value symbol pattern, and the lottery result information pattern is small. The symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed.

  Although not shown, for example, when L reach or SP reach is executed, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are reduced, and the left effect symbol EZ1 moves to the upper left corner of the display unit 50a. The right effect design EZ3 moves to the upper right corner of the display unit 50a. At this time, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are composed of only the numerical portion of the lottery result suggesting part G22a, and may be simplified before entering the L reach or the SP reach.

  As described above, since the set value effect suggesting the set value is executed in the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 executed in accordance with the variable display of the special figure, the game entertainment is improved and the game Can be prevented from getting bored. In particular, this effect is basically effective when a losing without reach continues repeatedly.

  In addition, the set value effect is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol as in the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, but is executed in the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 smaller than the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. It has not been. Thus, since the set value effects are not executed in duplicate, the set value effects become troublesome, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the set value effects.

(Modification of the third embodiment)
Although the set value effect in the third embodiment is executed using the composite symbol G22, the configuration of the composite symbol G22 is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the setting value suggesting part G22b related to the setting value effect is added to the lower end of the lottery result suggesting part G22a, and the position of the setting value suggesting part G22b with respect to the lottery result suggesting part G22a is appropriately set. Also good. Specifically, the set value suggesting portion G22b may be arranged at the upper end, right end, or left end of the lottery result suggesting portion G22a. Or you may arrange | position the setting value suggestion part G22b so that it may overlap with the lottery result suggestion part G22a. Furthermore, although the set value suggestion part G22b is smaller than the lottery result suggestion part G22a, the size of the set value suggestion part G22b with respect to the lottery result suggestion part G22a is substantially the same as the lottery result suggestion part G22a or the lottery result suggestion part G22a. It may be set appropriately, such as larger than.

  The set value effect is executed using the composite symbol G22. However, as in the basic embodiment, the effect symbol is generated using an image in which the set value suggesting part G22b that suggests the set value effect is not provided. EZ1 to EZ3 may be executed, and the set value effect may be executed using a symbol different from the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. In this case, the set value effect may be executed by providing an area for the set value effect in the display unit 50a or installing an image display device other than the image display device 50.

  Furthermore, the types of set value symbols G23 related to the set value effects of the third embodiment are “◯”, “Δ”, and “×”, but some of these, or “◇” and “□” For example, the set value effect may be executed by adding other types. Alternatively, the set value effect may be executed using an image completely different from “◯”, “Δ”, and “×”. Alternatively, the type of the set value design G23 related to the set value effect is set as one type, and the set value design G23 of the one type is only displayed at all the set value suggestion parts G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. A setting value may be suggested.

  In addition, the probability that the set value symbols G23 related to the set value effect of the third embodiment are displayed together in all the set value suggestion parts G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is the set value “1” and the set value “2”. ”, The set value“ 3 ”, the set value“ 4 ”, and the set value“ 5 ”and the set value“ 6 ”, respectively, so that the six set values are set to“ small ”,“ medium ”, and“ high ”. Although it is set separately, this dividing method is not limited to this, and may be set appropriately. For example, the probability that each set value symbol G23 is displayed together in all the set value suggestion portions G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be set differently for each of the six step set values. The set values may be set separately for “small” and “high” of set values “1” to “3” and set values “4” to “6”.

  In addition, the setting value effect of the third embodiment is executed in any special figure fluctuation effect, but is not executed in the jackpot special figure change effect, or the L reach and SP reach special figure change effects. You may restrict the execution conditions of value production. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the set value effect is to be executed at the start of the special figure variation effect, and the set value effect may be executed only when it is determined that the set value effect is to be executed. .

  Further, the set value effect of the third embodiment is executed in any one of the normal effect stages of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage in the low probability low base game state, but only in the specific normal effect stage. It may be executed. Alternatively, as the stage in the low-probability low-base game state, the first normal stage is a specific stage in which the set value stage is not executed in the first normal stage to the third normal stage. -It may be provided other than the third normal stage, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the stage may be shifted to a specific stage.

  The specific condition can be set as appropriate. For example, the specific condition is set to determine whether or not to shift to the specific effect stage at the end of the special figure variation effect related to the loss, and to be determined to shift to the specific effect stage in the determination. Also good. The specific condition may be set to execute a specific effect such as an SP reach effect or a demo effect. And if specific conditions are satisfied, you may make it transfer to the specific production stage from the special figure fluctuation production started next. In this case, the background image may be a background image dedicated to a specific effect stage. Alternatively, the background image is not changed, but the image used for variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be changed from the effect symbol G10 to the composite symbol G22.

  Further, the set value effect is executed when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, but the execution time of the set value effect is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the execution time of the set value effect is set when reach is established, and the shutter of the set value suggestion unit G22b is opened when the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stop when reach is established, and the first set value is set. Any of the symbol G23a, the second set value symbol G23b, and the third set value symbol G23c is displayed, and the set value displayed in the set value suggestion portion G22b related to the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 at that time You may make it suggest a setting value with the combination of the pattern G23.

  In addition, the shutter is displayed in the set value suggestion portion G22b until the set value symbol G23 is displayed in the set value effect, and the set value symbol G23 is hidden, but during the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, The set value symbol G23 can be visually recognized, and may be displayed in a variable manner, for example, like a reel or roulette of a so-called “rotating machine”.

  In addition, the set value effect of the third embodiment is executed only in the low probability low base gaming state, but may be executed in the high probability high base gaming state or the low probability high base gaming state. Alternatively, although not executed in the low probability low base gaming state, it may be executed in the high probability high base gaming state or the low probability high base gaming state.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute a set value effect suggesting a set value under conditions different from those of the first to third embodiments described above. Specifically, the set value effect is executed based on the number of executions of the special figure variable display after the power supply voltage is input to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In the fourth embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Moreover, the same code | symbol and term are used about the structure same as basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  First, the number of executions of the special figure variable display that is the trigger for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when the number of executions of the special figure variable display after the power supply voltage is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a specific number of times, the set value effect is executed when the jackpot is won. Hereinafter, the number of executions of the special figure variable display after the power supply voltage is input to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is referred to as “number of times after input”.

  The specific number of times is related to the so-called “zolo”. The specific number of times includes the same number of odd numbers in the last 3 digits, the number of times of throwing in the last 3 digits of the same even number, the number of times of throwing in the lower 2 digits of the same odd number, and the last 2 digits Are the same number of post-throws. In the following, the number of times after the insertion in which the lower three digits are the same odd number is referred to as “first odd specific number”, and the number of times in which the lower three digits are the same even number is referred to as “first even specific number”. The number of times after the injection that the lower two digits are composed of the same odd number is referred to as “second odd number of times”, and the number of times after the injection that the lower two digits are composed of the same even number is referred to as “second even number of specific times”. Called. Note that the second odd number of times does not include the first odd number of times. Further, the second even number of times does not include the first even number of times.

  Then, when the set value “3” or the set value “5” is set and the winning count is won by the special figure variable display when the number of times after the insertion is the first odd number of specific times, the presentation control microcomputer 121 In the jackpot game related to, a set value effect that suggests that the set value is 3 or 5 is executed. Specifically, a set value effect is executed between the final round game and the ending. Hereinafter, this set value effect is referred to as “odd high setting suggestion effect”.

  When the set value “4” or the set value “6” is set, and the number of times after throwing is the first even number of specific times, if the big win is won in the special figure variable display, the production control microcomputer 121 relates to the jackpot In the jackpot game, a set value effect suggesting that the set value is 4 or 6 is executed. Specifically, a set value effect is executed between the final round game and the ending. Hereinafter, this set value effect is referred to as “even high setting suggestion effect”.

  Then, when the set value “1”, the set value “3”, or the set value “5” is set and the number of times after throwing is the second odd number of specific times, and a big win is won in the special figure variable display, The microcomputer 121 executes a set value effect that suggests that the set value is 1, 3, or 5 in the jackpot game related to the jackpot. Specifically, a set value effect is executed between the opening and one round. In the following, this set value effect is referred to as an “odd setting suggestion effect”.

  Then, when the set value “2”, the set value “4”, or the set value “6” is set and the number of times after throwing is the second even number of specific times, and a win is won in the special figure variable display, The microcomputer 121 executes a set value effect that suggests that the set value is 2, 4, or 6 in the jackpot game related to the jackpot. Specifically, a set value effect is executed between the opening and one round. Hereinafter, this set value effect is referred to as “even setting suggestion effect”.

  Next, a specific example of the set value effect of the fourth embodiment will be described. First, the odd high setting suggesting effect will be described. For example, when the set value “3” or the set value “5” is set, and the number of times after the input is the first odd number of specific times such as 555, 777, 1111, and 1333, the special figure variable display wins the big win Then. Here, when the special figure variable display related to the jackpot is completed, the jackpot game is started, the round game proceeds, and the last round game is performed as shown in FIG. 59 (A).

  Then, when the ending is started and an attempt is made to switch from the round effect to the jackpot ending effect, the odd high setting suggesting effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59B, an image (hereinafter, referred to as “odd high setting image G31”) that suggests that the setting value is 3 or 5 is cut into the entire display unit 50a. Is displayed.

  The odd-high setting image G31 includes a rear view of a player wearing a baseball uniform with the back number “35”. This number indicates that the set value is 3 or 5. In the odd-high setting image G31, the player is encouraged to pay attention to the back number with the thumbs of both hands.

  Then, when the cut-in display of the odd high setting image G31, that is, the odd high setting suggesting effect is performed for about 3 seconds, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the odd high setting image G31 is switched to the ending background image G202. The odd high setting image G31 is deleted, the odd high setting suggesting effect is ended, and the jackpot ending effect is started.

  Next, the even high setting suggesting effect will be described. For example, when the set value “4” or the set value “6” is set, and the number of times after input is the first even number of specific times such as 666, 888, 1222, and 1444, the special figure variable display wins the big win Then. Here, when the special figure variable display related to the jackpot is completed, the jackpot game is started, the round game proceeds, and the last round game is performed as shown in FIG.

  When the ending is started and an attempt is made to switch from the round effect to the jackpot ending effect, the even high setting suggesting effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60B, an image that suggests that the setting value is 2 or 4 (hereinafter referred to as “even high setting image G32”) is cut into the entire display unit 50a. Is displayed.

  The even-high setting image G32 includes a back view of a player wearing a baseball uniform with a uniform number “46”. This back number suggests that the set value is 4 or 6. In the even-high setting image G32, the player is encouraged to pay attention to the back number with the thumbs of both hands.

  Then, when the cut-in display of the even high setting image G32, that is, the even high setting suggesting effect is performed for about 3 seconds, as shown in FIG. 60C, the even high setting image G32 is switched to the ending background image G202. The even high setting image G32 is deleted, the even high setting suggesting effect is ended, and the jackpot ending effect is started.

  Next, the odd setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, when the setting value “1”, the setting value “3”, or the setting value “5” is set, and the number of times after the input is the second odd number of specific times such as 55, 77, 133, and 211, etc. Suppose you win a jackpot with a variable display. Here, when the special figure variable display related to the jackpot ends, the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot opening effect is performed as shown in FIG.

  Then, when one round is started and an attempt is made to switch from the jackpot opening effect to the round effect, the odd setting suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), an image indicating that the set value is 1, 3 or 5 (hereinafter referred to as “odd set image G33”) is cut on the entire display unit 50a. Displayed.

  The odd setting image G33 includes the back of a player wearing a baseball uniform with the back number “135”. This back number suggests that the set value is 1, 3 or 5. In the odd setting image G33, the player is encouraged to pay attention to the back number with the thumbs of both hands.

  Then, when the cut-in display of the odd setting image G33, that is, the odd setting suggesting effect is performed for about 3 seconds, as shown in FIG. 61C, the odd setting image G33 is switched to the round background image G201, and the odd setting image is displayed. G33 is deleted, the odd setting suggestion effect ends, and a round effect of one round is started.

  Next, an even setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, when the set value “2”, the set value “4”, or the set value “6” is set, and the post-throw number is the second even specific number such as 66, 88, 122, and 344, the special drawing Suppose you win a jackpot with a variable display. Here, when the special figure variable display related to the jackpot ends, the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot opening effect is performed as shown in FIG.

  And when one round is started and it is going to switch from a jackpot opening effect to a round effect, an even setting suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), an image (hereinafter referred to as “even setting image G34”) suggesting that the setting value is 2, 4, or 6 is cut on the entire display unit 50a. Displayed.

  The even setting image G34 includes the back of a player wearing a baseball uniform with the back number “246”. This spin number suggests that the set value is 2, 4 or 6. In the even setting image G34, the player is encouraged to pay attention to the back number with the thumbs of both hands.

  Then, when the cut-in display of the even setting image G34, that is, the even setting suggesting effect is performed for about 3 seconds, the even setting image G34 is switched to the round background image G201 as shown in FIG. G34 is erased, the even setting suggestion effect ends, and a round effect of one round is started.

  Next, based on FIG. 63, the process which determines whether the production | presentation control microcomputer 121 performs a setting value production | presentation is demonstrated. This process is executed as a set value effect determination process immediately after the special figure change effect end process when it is determined in step S4305 of the received command analysis process (S4201) that the special figure change start command has been received.

  In the set value effect determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first adds “1” to the counter value of the post-injection number counter that counts the number of times after input in step S5101. The post-throw counter is provided in the effect RAM 124 and is incremented by “1” every time the set value effect determination process is performed.

  Next, in step S5102, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the big hit change is to be started based on the stored special figure change start command or the like. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the jackpot variation does not start, the setting value effect determination process ends. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the jackpot variation starts, in step S5103, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the post-input count counter to determine whether It is determined whether the three digits are the same number.

  If it is determined that the last three digits are not the same number, the production control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5109, and if it is determined that the last three digits are the same number, in step S5104, the post-input counter is checked to confirm the lower three digits. Is an odd number of the same number. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5107 if it determines that the lower three digits are not the same odd number, and proceeds to step S5105 if it determines that the lower three digits are the same odd number.

  In step S5105, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag to determine whether or not the set value is 3 or 5. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the setting value is not 3 or 5, the process proceeds to step S5112, and if it is determined that the setting value is 3 or 5, the odd high setting suggestion effect flag is set for effect in step S5106. The set value effect flag area of the RAM 124 is set, and the set value effect determination process ends.

  In step S5107, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag, and determines whether the set value is 4 or 6. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is neither 4 nor 6, the process proceeds to step S5114. If the effect value microcomputer 3 determines that the set value is 3 or 5, in step S5108, the even high setting suggestion effect flag is used for effect. The set value effect flag is set in the RAM 124, and the set value effect execution determination process ends.

  In step S5109, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the post-throw count counter to determine whether the last two digits of the post-throw count are the same number. When it is determined that the last two digits are not the same number, the effect control microcomputer 121 finishes the set value effect determination process. When the last two digits are determined to be the same number, in step S5110, the post-input counter is checked. , It is determined whether or not the last two digits are the same odd number. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5113 if it determines that the lower two digits are not the same odd number, and proceeds to step S5111 if it determines that the lower two digits are the same odd number.

  In step S5111, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag to determine whether the set value is 1, 3, or 5. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is not 1, 3, or 5, the effect control determination process ends, and if the effect is determined to be 1, 3, or 5, the process proceeds to step S5112. .

  In step S5112, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the odd setting suggestion effect flag in the set value effect flag area of the effect RAM 124, and ends the set value effect determination process.

  In step S5113, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag to determine whether the set value is 2, 4, or 6. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the setting value is neither 2, 4, or 6, it ends the setting value effect determination process, and if it determines that the setting value is 2, 4, or 6, it proceeds to step S5114. .

  In step S5114, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the even setting suggestion effect flag in the set value effect flag area of the effect RAM 124, and ends the set value effect determination process.

  The effect control microcomputer 121 sets the odd high setting suggestion effect flag, the even high setting suggestion effect flag, the odd setting suggestion effect flag, or the even setting suggestion effect flag, in the jackpot game based on the set value effect flag set. Then, the image control board 140 is caused to execute the odd high setting suggestion effect, the even high setting suggestion effect, the odd setting suggestion effect, or the even setting suggestion effect.

  For example, when the odd high setting suggestion effect flag or the even high setting suggestion effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 indicates an odd number indicating the content of the odd high setting suggestion effect in the ending effect start process (S4318). A high setting suggestion effect start command or an even high setting suggestion effect start command indicating the effect content of the even high setting suggestion effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set odd high setting suggestion effect start command or even high setting suggestion effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004).

  When the image control board 140 receives the odd high setting suggestion effect start command or the even high setting suggestion effect start command, the image control board 140 displays the odd high setting image G31 or the even high setting image G32 on the display unit 50a at the start of ending. The odd-numbered high setting image G31 or the even-numbered high setting image G32 is cut-in-displayed on the whole and the odd-numbered high setting suggesting effect or the even-high setting suggesting effect is executed, and then the big hit ending effect is performed.

  In addition, when the odd setting suggestion effect flag or the even setting suggestion effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts the odd setting suggestion effect indicating the effect content of the odd setting suggestion effect in the opening effect start (S4314). A command or an even setting suggestion effect start command indicating the effect content of the even setting suggestion effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set odd setting suggestion effect start command or even setting suggestion effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004).

  When the image control board 140 receives the odd setting suggestion effect start command or the even setting suggestion effect start command, the image control board 140 displays the odd setting image G33 or the even setting image G34 immediately before the opening ends and the round game starts. The odd setting image G33 or the even setting image G34 is cut-in-displayed on the entire display unit 50a and the odd setting suggesting effect or the even setting suggesting effect is executed, and then the round game effect is performed.

  In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourth embodiment, when the set value is set to an odd number, when the last two digits after the insertion or the lower three digits are the same number that is an odd number, A set value suggestion effect is executed that suggests that an odd set value is set. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourth embodiment, when the set value is set to an even number, if the big hit is won when the last two digits or the last three digits are the same number, The suggested set value effect that suggests that the set value has been set is executed. In this way, since the set value effect that suggests the set value is executed based on the number of times after insertion having relevance to the set value, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of times after input, and the gaming interest is improved. .

  In addition, when the lower three digits that are relatively infrequent are the same number, a set value effect with a narrower set value range is executed, so that the set value effect can be sharpened, Interest is improved.

(Modification of the fourth embodiment)
The set value effect in the fourth embodiment is executed using the odd high setting image G31, the even high setting image G32, the odd setting image G33, and the even setting image G34. However, the design of the image is not limited to this and is appropriately set. May be set. The number height setting image G31, the even number setting image G32, the odd number setting image G33, and the even number setting image G34 are collectively referred to as “setting value suggestion images G31 to G34”.

  In addition, the set value effect is performed by, for example, displaying the set value suggestion images G31 to G34 on the entire display unit 50a, but the display form is not limited to this and may be set as appropriate. . For example, the set value effect may be executed by displaying an object image that is not the entire display unit 50a on the display unit 50a. Also, the set value effect may be executed using specific elements of the opening background image G200, the round background image G201, and the ending background image G202, for example, the type, color, size, and shape of the character. Furthermore, instead of the image display device 50 or in addition to the image display device 50, the set value effect may be executed using other effect devices such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the panel movable device 55. . Further, all the contents of the four set value effects may be the same. In this case, since only the number of times after the insertion becomes a clue to specify the set value suggested by the set value effect, the game entertainment is improved.

  Further, the set value effect of the fourth embodiment is a jackpot game. Specifically, the odd high setting suggestion effect and the even high setting suggestion effect are executed between the round effect and the jackpot ending effect, The even setting suggestion effect is executed between the jackpot opening effect and the round effect, but the execution time is not limited to these and may be appropriately executed. Further, the execution times of the four set value effects may be set at the same time or at different times. Alternatively, a plurality of times when the set value effect can be executed may be set, and the execution time may be determined by a predetermined lottery.

  In addition, the set value effect of the fourth embodiment is executed in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won at a specific number of times after the insertion, but is executed in the special figure variable display related to the jackpot. May be. For example, the set value effect may be executed at the start of variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the jackpot, at the time of reach establishment, at the time of SP reach development, or at a specific timing of the special diagram variation effect. .

  In addition, although the jackpot winning is included in the conditions for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment, instead of the jackpot winning, SP reach or a specific SP reach with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot The execution of the specific effect may be a condition for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment. In this case, the set value effect may be executed at a specific timing of the special figure fluctuation effect at which the specific effect is executed.

  In addition, it is included in the condition for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment that the last two digits or the last three digits of the number of times after the insertion is the same number, but the condition is not limited to this. It may be set appropriately. For example, it may be set as the execution condition of the set value effect that the value obtained by adding the number of times after the insertion is an odd number or an even number. And, for example, if the set value is an odd number, if the winning combination is won when the value obtained by adding the number of post-throw times is an odd number, a set value effect that suggests that the set value is an odd number is executed and set. When the value is an even number, a set value effect may be executed that suggests that the set value is an even number if a big win is won when the value obtained by adding the number of times after the addition is an even number.

  Furthermore, the condition of the number of times after insertion for executing the set value effect may be either the lower two digits or the lower three digits of the number after the insertion. Furthermore, when the condition of the number of times after insertion for executing the set value effect is the last four digits or the lower five digits after the number of times after insertion, the effect of notifying the set value may be performed. . Also, the first two digits or the first three digits of the number of times after insertion may be used as the condition of the number of times after insertion for executing the set value effect.

  In addition, the type of set value effect includes an odd setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value is 1, 3, or 5, an odd high setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value is 3 or 5, and a set value. Is an even setting suggesting effect that suggests that the value is 2, 4, or 6, and an even high setting suggesting effect that suggests that the setting value is 4 or 6, but is not limited to this and is set appropriately. Also good. For example, only some of these types of set value effects may be executable. Also, for example, an odd low setting suggesting effect that suggests that the setting value is 1 or 3 and an even low setting suggesting effect that suggests that the setting value is 2 or 4 can be executed. Also good.

  Further, in the set value effect execution determination process, if it is determined in step S5105 that the set value is not 3 or 5, the process proceeds to step S5112, and the odd setting suggestion effect is executed. If it is determined in step S5107 that the set value is not 4 or 6, the process proceeds to step S5114 to execute an even setting suggesting effect. However, if it is determined in step S5105 that the setting value is not 3 or 5, or if it is determined in step S5107 that the setting value is not 4 or 6, the setting value effect determination process is ended, and the odd setting suggesting effect or even setting is set. The suggestion effect may not be executed.

  In the fourth embodiment, the set value effect is executed based on the number of executions of the variable display of the special figure after the power is turned on. However, the effect related to the set value is executed based on the number of times the jackpot game is executed after the power is turned on. May be executed. Or you may perform the production | presentation regarding a setting value based on the execution frequency of the specific jackpot game after power activation. As a specific jackpot game here, a jackpot game in which the game is controlled in a high probability high base gaming state after the jackpot game, a jackpot game in which the game is controlled in a high probability state after the jackpot game, You may set to the jackpot game in which a game is controlled in a short time state after the jackpot game.

  In this case, the execution timing of the effect related to the set value can be set as appropriate, but in the jackpot game, the effect related to the set value may be executed, or the effect related to the set value is executed in the probability change mode or the time reduction mode thereafter. Also good. Or you may perform the production | presentation regarding a setting value in the first demonstration production after that. Furthermore, in the special figure variation effect before the jackpot game is performed, an effect related to the set value may be executed.

  In general, the number of executions of the jackpot game is very small compared to the number of executions of the variable display of the special figure. Therefore, as an effect related to the setting value, the number of executions of the jackpot game or a specific jackpot game is two digits or more. In the case where the last two digits are the same number, a set value effect that suggests a set value that has a one-to-one correspondence with the set value as in the first embodiment may be executed. Alternatively, if the setting value is 1 to 3, a low setting suggesting effect that suggests a relatively low setting value is executed, and if the setting value is 4 to 6, the setting value is relatively low. The suggesting high setting suggesting effect may be executed.

  In addition, as the execution condition of the effect related to the set value, the number of executions of the jackpot game or the specific jackpot game after power-on may be set to a specific number such as 10 times or 20 times. Furthermore, as a performance execution condition regarding the set value, the so-called “continuous number of times” may be set to a specific number of times such as 10 times or 20 times. Further, it may be set that the last two digits of the so-called “number of consecutive times” are the same number. Note that the number of consecutive chants is the number of times that the jackpot game is continuously executed without entering the normal gaming state after the jackpot game is executed, and includes so-called “retraction”. However, it is possible not to include pullback in the number of consecutive chunks.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the fifth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute a set value effect that suggests a set value by using the stop display of the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. In the fifth embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Moreover, the same code | symbol and term are used about the structure same as basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variably displayed using the same effect symbol G10 as in the basic embodiment. However, regarding the stop display of the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serve as the set value effect and the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also do not serve as the set value effect. It differs from the basic embodiment in that there is a stop display.

  First, an example of stop symbol pattern determination processing including processing for determining whether or not to perform stop display of the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serve as set value effects will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the stop symbol pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the stored special diagram variation start command is a normal variation in step S5201. If it is not normal variation, the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5206. If it is normal variation, the value indicated by the set value effect execution determination random number counter is acquired as a set value effect execution determination random number in step S5202. In S5203, the set value effect execution determination is performed based on the acquired set value effect execution determination random number. The set value effect execution determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124 and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process in step S4003.

  The set value effect execution determination is executed using the set value effect execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 65, the set value effect execution determination table includes a set value effect execution determination table used when the special figure fluctuation pattern is a normal A loss fluctuation, and a special value fluctuation pattern when the special figure fluctuation pattern is a normal B loss fluctuation. There are a set value effect execution determination table used and a set value effect execution determination table used when the special figure change pattern is a normal C loss change. That is, a plurality of set value effect execution determination tables are provided in association with the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the normal fluctuation. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one set value effect execution determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern when the set value effect execution determination is performed.

  In each set value effect execution determination table, a random value for set value effect execution determination (set value effect execution determination value) is set to determine whether or not the set value effect can be executed, so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 65 is obtained. It is distributed. The set value effect execution determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

  In the setting value effect execution determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 compares the acquired set value effect execution determination random number with the selected set value effect execution determination table to determine whether or not the set value effect can be executed. In step S5204, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the set value effect as a result of the set value effect execution determination. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5205 when it is determined to execute the set value effect, and proceeds to step S5206 when it is determined not to execute the set value effect.

  In step S5205, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a set value effect stop symbol pattern determination table for performing stop display of the reach-less effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serve as the set value effect. In step S5206, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a normal stop symbol pattern determination table for performing stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serve as set value effects.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the set value effect stop symbol pattern determination table is associated with the set value. Specifically, the stop symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is “1”, the stop symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is “2”, the stop symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is “2”, the setting Stop symbol pattern determination table used when value is “3”, Stop symbol pattern determination table used when value is “4”, Stop symbol pattern determination table used when value is “5”, and setting value There is a stop symbol pattern determination table used for “6”. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one set value symbol pattern determination table associated with the set value in step S5205.

  In each set value effect stop symbol pattern determination table, stop symbol pattern determination random numbers (stop symbol pattern determination values) are assigned to stop symbol patterns so as to achieve the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. Yes.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 to 68, the normal stop symbol pattern determination table is associated with the stop symbol and the special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, in the normal stop symbol determination table, the stop symbol pattern determination table used when the stop special symbol is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the stop special symbol is the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol C, the jackpot Stop symbol pattern determination table used when symbol E or jackpot symbol F is used, stop symbol pattern determination table used when special symbol variation pattern is loss with reach, and special symbol variation pattern when loss without reach There is a stop symbol pattern determination table used. Therefore, in step S5206, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the normal stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop symbol indicated by the symbol designation command or the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command.

  In each normal stop symbol pattern determination table, stop symbol pattern determination random number values (stop symbol pattern determination values) are distributed to the stop symbol patterns so that the selection rates (%) shown in FIGS. 67 to 68 are obtained. ing.

  In step S5207, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and in step S5208, the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number is used as the stop symbol pattern determination random number. Stop symbol pattern determination is performed in which the stop symbol pattern is determined by collating with the stop symbol pattern determination table selected in step S5206. Note that the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124 and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process in step S4003.

  Then, in step S5209, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets stop symbol pattern data representing the determined stop symbol pattern in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and in step S5210, a stop symbol pattern command representing the determined stop symbol pattern. Is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the stop symbol pattern determination process is completed.

  When the effect design command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined effect design from the image ROM 142. G10 is read out, and on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed with the stop symbol pattern indicated by the stop symbol pattern command, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed.

  Here, the set value effect using the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 66, six types of stop symbol patterns related to the set value effect are set: stop symbol pattern 61 to stop symbol pattern 66. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed with these six stop symbol patterns also serves as a set value effect.

  The stop symbol pattern 61 includes stop symbols of 1 (blue), 3 (red), and 5 (blue). Since all the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 constituting the stop symbol pattern 61 are odd numbers, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 61 suggests that the set value is an odd number.

  The stop symbol pattern 62 includes 2 (blue), 4 (blue), and 6 (blue) stop symbols. Since all the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 constituting the stop symbol pattern 62 are even numbers, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 62 suggests that the set value is an even number.

  The stop symbol pattern 63 includes stop symbols of 1 (blue), 2 (blue), and 3 (red). Since the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 constituting the stop symbol pattern 63 all represent relatively low set values among the set values, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 63 is This indicates a low setting value.

  The stop symbol pattern 64 includes 4 (blue), 5 (blue), and 6 (blue) stop symbols. Since the numbers included in the effect design G10 constituting the stop design pattern 64 all represent a relatively high set value among the set values, the stop display of the effect designs EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop design pattern 64 is This indicates that the setting value is high.

  The stop symbol pattern 65 includes 6 (blue), 5 (blue), and 1 (blue) stop symbols. Because the numbers included in the production symbol G10 that constitutes the stop symbol pattern 65 are read from the left, it is a word that means “good”, “Mu (6) Go (5) I (1)”. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 65 suggests that the set value “1” is the most unfavorable to the player.

  The stop symbol pattern 66 includes stop effect symbols of 3 (blue), 1 (blue), and 5 (blue). The numbers included in the production design G10 that constitutes the stop design pattern 66, when read from the left, are words that mean “the highest degree”, “sa (3) i (1) ko (5)”. Therefore, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 66 suggests that the set value “6” is most advantageous to the player.

  When the set value is “1”, the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 60%, the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a probability of 35%, and the stop symbol pattern 65 is selected with a probability of 5%. When the set value is “2”, the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a probability of 55%, and the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a probability of 45%. In the case of the set value “3”, the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 45%, and the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a probability of 55%. In the case of the set value “4”, the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 60%. When the setting value is “5”, the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 35%, and the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 65%. In the case of the set value “6”, the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a probability of 25%, the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 70%, and the stop symbol pattern 66 is selected with a probability of 5%.

  The stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serves as the set value effect, and the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serve as the set value effect, Do not overlap. In the following, the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serves as the set value effect is referred to as a “specific stop symbol pattern”. Moreover, the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serves as the set value effect is referred to as a “non-specific stop symbol pattern”.

  As described above, the set value effect is executed by the display contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, specifically, the numerical part included in the effect symbol G10, in the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 without reach. It is possible to focus attention on the stop display of the reach-less design symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are most difficult for the player to be interested, thereby preventing the game from getting bored and improving the game entertainment.

  For the set value “2” to the set value “5”, like the stop symbol pattern 65 and the stop symbol pattern 66 corresponding to the set value “1” and the set value “6”, the stop directly suggests the set value. Although a symbol pattern is not set, a set value can be estimated by a combination of stop symbol patterns that appear. Since the set value is suggested by the combination of the stop symbol patterns that appear in this way, the game entertainment is further improved.

  For the stop symbol pattern 61, the selection rate is high in the order of setting value “1”> setting value “3”> setting value “5”. Further, for the stop symbol pattern 62, the selection rate is high in the order of setting value “2”> setting value “4”> setting value “6”. For the stop symbol pattern 63, the selection rate is high in the order of setting value “3”> setting value “2”> setting value “1”. Further, for the stop symbol pattern 64, the selection rate is high in the order of setting value “6”> setting value “5”> setting value “4”. Thus, a predetermined stop symbol pattern can appear at a plurality of set values, and the selection rate varies depending on the set value. Therefore, the set value can be estimated based on the appearance frequency of the stop symbol pattern. Therefore, the game entertainment is improved.

(Modification of the fifth embodiment)
The stop effect symbols constituting the specific stop symbol pattern are not limited to the stop effect symbols shown in FIG. 66, and may be set as appropriate. Further, in addition to the loss without reach, the set value effect may be executed by stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the loss with reach or the jackpot. Further, the set value effect is performed when it is determined by the set value effect determination that the set value effect is executed, but the execution condition of the set value effect is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the execution condition of the set value effect is that the reach-less special figure change effect is performed in a specific period such as while the special figure change effect is executed 10 times after the SP reach loss change. May be.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the sixth embodiment, when the set value is high, the effect of the content that does not appear when the set value is low is performed. As an example, when the set value is high, a big hit may be made with a content that does not become a big win when the set value is low. In the sixth embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Moreover, the same code | symbol and term are used about the structure same as basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  As described above, for example, when the content of SP reach is composed of a confrontation scene between a baseball pitcher and a batter, if the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the special figure fluctuation effect is SP loss fluctuation, SP reach is advanced. After the victory or defeat point is reached, after the enemy character hits the home run and loses to the confrontation, the hero character is disappointed on the mound and the losing notification effect is performed, and then the stop symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the losing effect are displayed as they are (FIG. 26 (A-2), FIG. 26 (B-2), FIG. 26 (C-2)). Then, when there is a special figure hold, the next special figure variation effect is executed immediately.

  Here, in the sixth embodiment, when the setting value is 5 or 6, when the winning or losing point is reached in the SP reach for the jackpot (FIG. 69 (A)), the enemy character then hits a home run and confronts. Is lost (FIG. 69 (B)), and the losing notice effect that the hero character is disappointed on the mound is performed (FIG. 69 (C)), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbol KZ1 showing the big hits as they are. ~ KZ3 is stopped (FIG. 69 (D)), and the opening effect of the jackpot game is entered (FIG. 69 (E)).

  In this way, when the set value is set to 5 or 6, if the set value is other than 5 or 6, the set value becomes a big hit with the effect contents that appear only in the special figure variation effect related to the loss. It is suggested that it be set to 5 or 6. In the following, an effect that reverses the contents of the effect in this way and becomes a big hit is referred to as a “success / reverse effect”. The success / failure rendition effect constitutes a set value effect that suggests that the set value is the relatively high set value 5 or the set value 6.

  In the sixth embodiment, if the big hit is made when the set value is set to 5 or 6, the success / failure reversal effect is not always executed, but the success / failure reversal effect is executed with a predetermined probability. That is, when the set value is set to 5 or 6, there are a case where the success / failure reversal effect is executed and a big hit, and a case where the success / failure reversal effect is not executed and the case is a big hit as usual. In the sixth embodiment, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed by SP reach or L reach.

  In the sixth embodiment, three types of SP reach, SP reach A to SP reach C, are set in the SP reach. Further, three types of L reach, L reach A to L reach C, are set in the L reach. In each SP reach and each L reach, production contents related to winning or losing and success or failure are set. And basically, if you win a jackpot, you will eventually win or succeed, while if you lose, you will eventually lose or fail. Here, “basically” is because there are cases where a success / failure reversal effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the effect content of SP reach A is a confrontation between the main character as a pitcher and batter A of the enemy team XX. The effect of SP reach B is a confrontation between the main character as a pitcher and batter B of enemy team ΔΔ. The content of the SP Reach C is a confrontation between the main character as a pitcher and the batter C of the enemy team xx.

  In the normal SP reach A in the case of SP jackpot fluctuation, the main character finally beats batter A in three strikes and wins the confrontation. Similarly, in the normal SP reach B in the case of the SP jackpot fluctuation, the main character finally beats the batter B in three strikes and wins the confrontation. In SP reach C in the case of SP jackpot fluctuation, the hero character finally beats batter C in three strikes and wins the confrontation.

  On the other hand, in the normal SP reach A in the case of SP loss fluctuation, the main character finally hits the batter A and loses to the confrontation. Similarly, in the normal SP reach B in the case of SP loss fluctuation, the main character finally hits the batter B and loses to the confrontation. In SP reach C in the case of the SP loss variation, the main character finally hits the batter C and wins the defeat. Here, the “normal” SP reach A to SP reach C are because the success / failure reversal effect may be performed.

  Further, the production contents of L reach A are special training for acquiring new skills of the main character. The production content of L reach B is confession to the favorite woman of the hero character. The contents of L reach C are candidates for the student council president.

  Then, in the normal L reach A in the case of the SP jackpot fluctuation, new skill acquisition is successful. Similarly, in the normal L reach B in the case of SP jackpot fluctuation, the confession is finally succeeded. In L reach C in the case of SP jackpot fluctuation, it is elected to the student council president.

  On the other hand, in the normal L reach A in the case of SP loss variation, new skill acquisition fails. Similarly, in the normal L reach B in the case of the SP loss variation, the confession eventually fails. In L reach C in the case of SP loss fluctuation, the student council is lost. Here, the “normal” L reach A to L reach C are because there may be a success / failure reversal effect.

  In this way, the jackpot SP reach or L reach is the content of the final victory or success. On the other hand, the SP reach or L reach of lose is the content of the production that eventually loses or fails. Therefore, when the success / failure reversal effect is executed in the case of a big win, after a final defeat or failure, the big win is notified suddenly and unexpectedly by the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the big win.

  Specifically, in the case of SP Reach A, after the confrontation between the hero character and the batter A, the batter A finally hit a home run and the hero character was defeated by the confrontation and then disappointed, and the directing pattern showing the jackpot Stop display of EZ1 to EZ3 is performed (see FIG. 69). Similarly, in SP Reach B, after the main character and batter B are confronted, the home run is finally hit by batter B, and the main character is defeated by the confrontation and then disappointed. Stop display is performed. In SP Reach C, after the main character and batter C face off, the batter C finally hit a home run and the main character loses the showdown and is disappointed, and then the stop symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the jackpot are displayed. Done.

  Also, in L reach A, special symbols for new skills are acquired, and after the main character fails to learn special skills and is discouraged, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the jackpot are stopped and displayed. . Similarly, if it is L reach B, after the confession to the favorite woman, the hero character failed in the confession after being struck by the favorite woman and discouraged, the stop of the design symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the jackpot Display is performed. In L reach C, after the student president's election is finally lost and the hero character fails in the election and is discouraged, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the jackpot are stopped and displayed.

  Here, the probability of selecting SP reach A to SP reach C and L reach A to L reach C (“selectivity” in FIG. 70) is set as shown in FIG. The special figure variation pattern determination random number value (special diagram variation pattern determination value) is appropriately distributed to various effects so as to achieve the selection rate shown in FIG.

  In the case of jackpot, the selectivity is high in the order of SP reach A> SP reach B> SP reach C. On the other hand, in the case of loss, the selectivity is high in the order of SP reach C> SP reach B> SP reach A. Therefore, there is a high possibility of winning a big hit in the order of SP reach A> SP reach B> SP reach C.

  In the case of jackpot, the selection rate is high in the order of L reach A> L reach B> L reach C. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, the selectivity is high in the order of L reach C> L reach B> L reach A. Therefore, there is a high possibility of winning a big hit in the order of L reach A> L reach B> L reach C.

  Next, an example of processing for determining whether to execute the success / failure reversal effect will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, this process is referred to as a success / failure effect determination process. As the success / failure reversal effect determination process, for example, the process shown in FIG. 71 is performed. In the special figure variation effect start process of the effect control microcomputer 121 in step S4306, a special figure variation effect pattern command representing a special figure variation effect pattern is displayed in the effect RAM 124. This can be done after setting the predetermined area.

  In step S5301, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the stored special figure fluctuation start command is the SP jackpot fluctuation or the L jackpot fluctuation, in step S5301. It is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot SP reach effect or the jackpot L reach effect. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure fluctuation pattern is not the SP jackpot fluctuation or the L jackpot fluctuation, the success / failure reverse effect determination process is finished and the process returns to the special figure fluctuation effect start process, and the special figure fluctuation pattern changes to the SP jackpot fluctuation. Or, if it is determined that the L big hit variation, the process proceeds to step S5302.

  In step S5302, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag to determine whether or not the set value is set to “5” or “6”. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the setting value is not set to “5” or “6”, the success / failure reversal effect determination process is finished and the process returns to the special figure change effect start process, and the setting value is “5”. If it is determined that “6” is set, the process advances to step S5303.

  In step S5303, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a success / failure effect determination table. The success / failure reversal effect determination table is a data table used when the success / failure reversal effect determination for determining whether or not to execute the success / failure reversal effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 72, the success / failure reversal effect determination table is first associated with a set value. Furthermore, the success / failure reversal effect determination table associated with the set value is associated with the effect type, specifically, the SP reach type or the L reach type.

  Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 refers to the set value flag and the special figure variation production pattern data stored in the production RAM 124 to confirm the set value and the production type, and the set value and the production type. The success / failure rendition effect execution determination table associated with is selected.

  In each success / failure reverse effect execution determination table, the success / failure reverse effect determination random number value (success / failure reverse effect determination value) is assigned to whether the success / failure reverse effect can be executed or not so as to achieve the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. ing. The success / failure reversal effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

  Next, in step S5304, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the success / failure reverse effect determination random number counter as a success / failure reverse effect determination random number, and in step S5305 the acquired success / failure reverse effect determination random number is obtained. Success / failure reversal effect determination is performed by collating with the success / failure reversal effect determination table selected in S5303. The success / failure reversal effect determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124 and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process in step S4003.

  Subsequently, in step S5306, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether to execute the success / failure reverse effect as a result of the success / failure reverse effect determination. If it is determined that the success / failure reversal effect is not to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 121 ends the success / failure reversal effect determination process and returns to the special figure variation effect start process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the success / failure reversal effect is to be executed, in step S5307 Is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, the success / failure reverse effect execution determination process is finished, and the process returns to the special figure fluctuation effect start process.

  When the success / failure reverse effect command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 performs L reach or SP reach. At that time, the success or failure reversal effect is executed by displaying an image related to L reach or SP reach of the effect content that is normally performed on the display unit 50a, and finally the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the jackpot Stop display.

  In addition, according to the success / failure reverse effect determination table according to the sixth embodiment, the selection rate for the execution of the success / failure reverse effect is greater when the set value is “6” than the set value “5” for each type of effect. It is set high. Therefore, when the success / failure reversal effect is executed, the set value “6” can be expected more than the set value “5”. For each set value, there is a high possibility that a success / failure reversal effect will be executed in the order of SP reach C> SP reach B> SP reach A. Similarly, the possibility that the success / failure reversal effect is executed in the order of L reach C> L reach B> L reach A is set high. These orders coincide with the order of probabilities selected in the case of a loss with respect to the same reach production. That is, the tendency of the selection rate with respect to the execution of the success / failure rendition and the tendency of the expectation level of the losing with respect to the same reach effect coincide. Therefore, while reducing the original function of the reach production as much as possible, the game entertainment is improved by the success / failure production.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, since the success / failure reversal effect is executed, the jackpot is produced with a theory different from the normal theory, so that the player can be surprised and experience a fresh taste. Furthermore, since a setting value is suggested in it, amusement interest is improved. Further, since the success / failure reversal effect is executed when “5” and “6” having relatively high set values are set, it is possible to raise the player's mood. Furthermore, since the success / failure reversal effect is executed at the time of the big hit, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from deteriorating.

(Modification of the sixth embodiment)
The success / failure reversal effect may be executed by SP reach or L reach, but the type of effect in which the success / failure reversal effect is executed is not limited and may be set as appropriate. The success / failure reversal effect may be executed only by SP reach. Also, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed only in the L reach. Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed by some types of SP reach and L reach such as SP reach A and L reach A, for example. Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed by an effect other than SP reach or L reach.

  Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed when the set value is “5” or “6”, but the setting value for executing the success / failure reversal effect is not limited and may be set as appropriate. For example, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed only with one specific set value such as the set value “6”. Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed at the highest setting value and the lowest setting value such as the setting values “6” and “1”.

  Furthermore, the specific content of the success / failure reverse effect is not limited to the content shown in FIG. 69 and may be set as appropriate. In addition, instead of executing an effect that suggests a set value with a story-like effect content like the above-described success / failure reversal effect, for example, a light emission mode that appears only when the set value is “5” or “6” Thus, the frame lamp 53 may emit light. Similarly, the panel movable device 55 may be operated in an operation mode that appears only when the set value is “5” or “6”. Furthermore, sound that appears only when the setting value is “5” or “6” may be output from the speaker 52. These are not limited to special figure variation effects, but may be a jackpot game effect or a demonstration effect.

  In addition, the success / failure reversal effect is performed as a special figure variation effect, and the success / reversal reversal effect is basically performed after an effect having a function that suggests a loss, such as defeat or failure, and then a jackpot game is performed. The application scene of success / failure reversal production is not limited to this. For example, a so-called “rank-up bonus” round game is performed, and in this round game, the round game continues if it is the content of success or victory at the branch point whether or not the round game continues. It is assumed that the round game ends when the production content is failure or defeat. When the set value “5” or “6” is set, the success / failure reversal effect is executed in this scene, and the game may be continued, although the failure or defeat may occur.

  Also, in jackpot games, if the content is a success or victory, the high probability state is set after the jackpot game, and if the content is a failure or defeat, the high probability state is set after the jackpot game. Suppose not. If the set value “5” or “6” is set, the success / failure reversal effect is executed in this scene, and the effect is that the game will eventually fail or lose. May be set.

  In addition, there are multiple types of high-probability regulation times when a high-probability state is set in the same production mode after a jackpot game. It is assumed that when the special figure variable display related to the number of times is executed, the effect of whether or not the high probability state continues is executed as a branch point of whether or not the high probability state continues. This effect is assumed to be a predetermined confrontation or mission. Basically, if the high probability state continues, you win by confrontation or succeed in mission. On the other hand, if the high probability state does not continue, it will be defeated in a confrontation or failed in a mission. If the set value “5” or “6” is set, the success / failure reversal effect is executed in this scene, and it is defeated in the confrontation or fails in the mission, but the high probability state can be continued. You may do it.

  Moreover, you may perform success / failure reversal production | presentation using loss fluctuation. For example, if it was originally defeated in a confrontation and lost, but by winning the confrontation and losing it, it was suggested that the set value was “5” or “6” Also good. In this case, it can be seen that the set value is high, but the player's willingness to play can be suppressed. Moreover, in the success / failure determination, the probability tendency to determine that the success / failure rendition effect is executed may be set as appropriate. For example, in the case of the set value “5” and the case of the set value “6”, the probability of determining that the success / failure reversal effect is to be executed for each type of effect may be set to be the same. Further, the probability of determining to execute the success / failure reversal effect regardless of the set value and the type of effect may be set constant. Further, for each set value, the probability of determining that the success / failure reversal effect is executed in the order of SP reach A> SP reach B> SP reach C and L reach A> L reach B> L reach C is increased. You may set as follows. That is, the tendency of the jackpot expectation indicated by the type of reach effect may coincide with the probability of the probability of determining to execute the success / failure reversal effect.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the seventh embodiment, when the number of times that the special figure variable display continues to be executed without winning a jackpot reaches a predetermined number, a set value effect that suggests a set value is executed. A plurality of the predetermined number of times are set, and as the predetermined number of times increases, it becomes easier to determine the set value that has been set. In the following description, the number of times that the special figure variable display is continuously executed without winning a jackpot is referred to as “hammer count”. In the seventh embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Moreover, the same code | symbol and term are used about the structure same as basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  As described above, various effect modes are set in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and various background images are displayed on the display unit 50a in accordance with the effect modes. For example, when the normal effect mode is set, any one of the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, or the third normal background image G113 is displayed on the display unit 50a.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the normal effect mode is set, the setting value suggesting background image G140 may be displayed in addition to the normal background images G111 to G113. The display of the set value suggestion background image G140 is also referred to as “stay in the set value suggestion zone”. The setting value suggesting background image G140 is displayed when the number of hooks reaches a predetermined number. That is, when the number of hooks reaches a predetermined number, the set value suggestion zone is entered. In addition, by displaying the set value suggestion background image G140, in other words, by entering the set value suggestion zone and staying, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is suggested. In the following, displaying the set value suggesting background image G140 and staying in the set value suggesting zone are also referred to as execution of the set value effect.

  Specifically, when the number of hooks reaches 500, 750, and 1000, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, or the third normal background displayed at that time The setting value suggestion background image G140 is switched from the image G113. The setting value suggesting background image G140 is a dedicated background image for setting value effects, and includes a first normal background image G111, a second normal background image G112, a third normal background image G113, and a probability changing background image G120. , And any background image such as the time-shortening background image G130.

  The display of the setting value suggestion background image G140 is continued until a predetermined number of special figure variable display is executed without winning a big hit, or until a big hit is won before a predetermined number of special figure variable display is executed. Executed. That is, if the special figure variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without winning a big hit, or if the big win is won before the predetermined number of special figure variable displays is executed, the set value suggestion zone is exited. As the predetermined number of times, 1 to 6 times are set. Hereinafter, this predetermined number of times is referred to as “continuation number”.

  The number of continuation times is determined by the continuation number determination that determines how many times the continuation number is to be set. The continuation number determination is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 using the continuation number determination table. The continuation count determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the continuation count determination table is associated with the number of hooks. That is, the continuation number determination table used in the continuation number determination differs depending on the number of hooks. Furthermore, the continuation count determination table associated with the number of hooks is also associated with the set value. That is, the continuation count determination table used in the continuation count determination varies depending on the set value.

  Thus, the continuation count determination table is associated with the number of hooks and the set value. And the selection rate of each continuation number (1-6) is set with the combination of the number of hooks and a set value.

  According to the continuation count determination table, when the number of hooks is 500, the probability of selecting the continuation count as 1 is set value “1”> set value “2”> set value “3”> set value “4”. > Set value “5”> Set value “6” in order. That is, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone when the number of hooks is 500, it is highly possible that the set values are in this order.

  Further, when the number of hooks is 500, the probability that the continuation number is selected as 6 is set value “6”> set value “5”> set value “4”> set value “3”> set value “2”. "> Higher in the order of set value" 1 ". That is, if the special figure variable display is performed 6 times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of hooks is 500 times, there is a high possibility that the set values are in this order.

  Further, when the number of hooks is 500, the probability that the continuation number is selected as 2 is the highest when the set value is “2”, and the probability when the set value is “5” or the set value “6” is the highest. Low. That is, when the special figure variable display is performed twice in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of hooks is 500, the possibility of the set value “2” is the highest, and the set value “5” or the set value “6” Least likely.

  Alternatively, when the number of hooks is 500, the probability that the continuation number is selected as 4 is the highest when the setting value is “4”, and the probability when the setting value is “1” or the setting value “2” is the highest. Low. That is, if the special figure variable display is performed four times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of hooks is 500 times, the possibility of the set value “4” is the highest, and the set value “1” or the set value “2” Least likely.

  Further, when the number of hooks is 500, the probability of selecting the number of continuations as 5 is highest when the setting value is “5”, and most when the setting value is “1” or “2”. Low. That is, when the special figure variable display is performed five times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of hooks is 500, the possibility of the set value “5” is the highest, and the set value “1” or the set value “2” Least likely.

  When the number of hooks is 500, and the setting value is “6”, the selection rate for the number of continuations “1” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of hooks is 500, there is no possibility that the set value is “6”. Similarly, when the number of hooks is 500, if the set value is “1”, the selection rate for the number of continuations “6” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed six times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of hooks is 500, there is no possibility that the set value is “1”.

  Further, when the number of hooks is 750, and the setting value is “3” to the setting value “6”, the selection rate for the continuation number “1” or “2” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed once or twice in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of hooks is 750, there is no possibility of the set value “3” to the set value “6”, and the set value “ Either “1” or the set value “2” is set. However, when the number of continuations is one, the possibility of the setting value “1” is higher, whereas when the number of continuations is two, the possibility of the setting value “2” is higher. .

  Further, when the number of hooks is 750, and the setting value is “5” to the setting value “6”, the selection rate for the continuation number “3” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed three times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of hooks is 750, there is no possibility of the set value “5” to the set value “6”, and the set value “1” to One of the setting values “4” is set. However, in this case, the possibility of the setting value “3” is the highest, and the possibility of the setting value “1” is the lowest.

  When the number of hooks is 750, the selection rate for the number of continuations “4” is higher than 0 regardless of the setting value “1” to the setting value “6”. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed four times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of hooks is 750, any of the set values “1” to “6” may be set. become. However, in this case, the possibility of the setting value “4” is the highest and the possibility of the setting value “1” is the lowest.

  Furthermore, when the number of hooks is 750 and the setting value is “1” to the setting value “2”, the selection rate for the continuation number “5” or “6” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed 5 or 6 times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of hooks is 750, there is no possibility that the set value “1” to the set value “2”. Any one of “3” to the set value “6” is set. However, when the number of continuations is 5, the possibility of the setting value “5” is high, and the possibility of the setting value “3” is the lowest. On the other hand, when the number of continuations is 6, the possibility of the setting value “6” is high, and the possibility of the setting value “3” is the lowest.

  In this way, when the number of hooks is 500 times and 750 times, there may be a plurality of setting values for one continuation number, and since the selection rate varies depending on the setting value, the setting value depends on the continuation number. It will be suggested. On the other hand, when the number of hooks is 1000, only one set value is associated with one continuation number, so the set value is notified by the continuation number.

  Specifically, when the number of hooks is 1000 and the setting value “2” to the setting value “6” is set, the selection rate for the continuation number “1” is 0%, and the setting value “ When “1” is set, the selection rate for the continuation count “1” is 100%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of hooks is 1000, there is no possibility of the set value “2” to the set value “6”, and the set value “1”. Is set. Similarly, when the number of hooks is 1000, and when the set value suggestion zone continues 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, 5 times, 6 times, the set value “2” and the set value “3” The set value “4”, the set value “5”, and the set value “6” are set.

  In this way, the production control microcomputer 121 performs the continuation number determination based on the continuation number determination table, but performs the continuation number determination at the time of stop display of the special drawing, that is, at the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. be able to. Then, when the production control microcomputer 121 determines the number of continuations by determining the number of continuations, the setting value production starts at the end of the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the normal background images G111 to G113 that have been displayed so far. To set value suggesting background image G140. Thereafter, the set value effect is continuously executed until the special figure variable display is executed for the number of times without winning the jackpot. Then, when the special figure variable display for the number of times of continuation ends, the set value effect ends, and the set value suggestion background image G140 switches to the normal background images G111 to G113 immediately before the set value effect is executed.

  Next, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), it is assumed that the special figure variation effect with the number of hooks of 500 is being executed. At this time, the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the display unit 50a. Further, it is assumed that the special figure fluctuation pattern of the 500th special figure fluctuation display is a loss fluctuation. Then, it is assumed that, in the special figure variation effect with the number of hooks of 500, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

  Here, when the number of times of continuation is determined and the number of times of continuation is determined, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 ends, and the next special figure variation effect is started. The set value effect starts, and the first normal background image G111 is switched to the set value suggesting background image G140.

  In addition, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 with the number of hooks of 500 is finished, if the special figure hold number is “0”, the following special figure variable display and special figure variation effect are started. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is continuously executed, but according to the fact that the special symbol determination time has elapsed since the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, that is, the special symbol hold When the next special figure variation effect is started, the set value effect starts, and the first normal background image G111 switches to the set value suggestion background image G140.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 75 (A) to 75 (C), the set value effect is executed until the special value variable display of the set value effect continuation count is executed without winning the jackpot. When stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 for the number of times of continuation is performed, as shown in FIG. 1 Switch to the normal background image G111.

  74 to 75 exemplify the set value effect when the number of hooks reaches 500 times, but the set value effect is similarly executed when the number of hooks reaches 750 and 1000 times.

  Next, in the seventh embodiment, an example of the set value effect process performed for the effect control microcomputer 121 to execute the set value effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 may perform the set value effect process shown in FIGS. 76 to 77 after the special figure fluctuation stop process in step S4308 when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation stop command is received in step S4307. it can.

  In the set value effect process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the normal effect mode is set as step S5401. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the normal effect mode is not set, it ends the set value effect process, and if it determines that the normal effect mode is set, it proceeds to step S5402.

  In step S5402, the effect control microcomputer 121 adds “1” to the counter value of the hook number counter that counts the number of hooks. As described above, the counter value of the hook count counter is incremented by “1” every time the special figure variation display is completed in the normal performance mode. The hook count counter is provided in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. Further, the hook number counter is cleared as the jackpot game is executed.

  Next, in step S5403, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the number of remaining set value effects described later is one or more. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the remaining set value effect number is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S5416. If the remaining set value effect number is not 1 or 0, that is, 0, the process proceeds to step S5404.

  Next, in step S5404, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the hook number counter to determine whether or not the hook number is 500 times. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of hooks is not 500, the process proceeds to step S5406, and if it is determined that the number of hooks is 500, the process proceeds to step S5405 and the number-of-continuations determination table for the number of hooks 500 times. Is selected and the process proceeds to step S5410.

  In step S5406, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the hook number counter and determines whether the hook number is 750 or not. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of hooks is not 750, the process proceeds to step S5408, and if it is determined that the number of hooks is 750, the process proceeds to step S5407 and the continuation number determination table for the number of hooks 750 times. Is selected and the process proceeds to step S5410.

  In step S5408, the production control microcomputer 121 checks the hook number counter and determines whether the hook number is 1000 times. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of hooks is not 1000, the setting value effect process is finished, and when it is determined that the number of hooks is 1000, the process proceeds to step S5409, where the number of hooks is 1000. The determination table is selected and the process proceeds to step S5410.

  In step S5410, the production control microcomputer 121 further confirms the set value flag from the continuation number determination table for the selected number of hooks of 500 times, 750 times, or 1000 times, and associates it with the set value. Select the continuation count determination table.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the continuation number determination random number counter as a continuation number determination random number in step S5411, and in step S5412 selects the acquired continuation number determination random number in step S5410. The number of continuations is determined by collating with the continuation number determination table.

  In each continuation number determination table, the continuation number determination random number value (continuation number determination value) is assigned to the continuation number so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 73 is obtained. The random number counter for continuation number determination is provided in the effect RAM 124 and is updated as appropriate in the random number seed update process in step S4003.

  In step S5413, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the continuation count, which is the result of the continuation count determination, in the set value effect remaining count counter. In step S5414, the effect RAM 124 stores the normal effect stage data indicating the current normal effect stage. In step S5415, a set value effect start command indicating the effect contents of the set value effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the set value effect process ends.

  The counter value of the set value effect remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of special figure variable displays that can execute the set value effect. As will be described later, in the set value effect, as long as the set value effect remaining number counter is 1 or more, “1” is subtracted every time the set value effect process is performed. In the following, the remaining number of special figure fluctuation displays that can be performed with the set value effect is referred to as “set value effect remaining number”.

  When the set value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ1. When the special figure determination time has elapsed since EZ3 was stopped, the current normal background images G111 to G113 are switched to the set value suggesting background image G140.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 subtracts “1” from the counter value of the set value effect remaining number counter in step S 5416, and determines whether or not the set value effect remaining number is “0” in step S 5417. To do. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the remaining set value effect number is not “0”, the setting value effect process is finished as it is, and if it is determined that the remaining set value effect number is “0”, in step S <b> 5418, The production stage data is confirmed, the normal production stage before execution of the set value production is shown, and a set value production end command indicating that the set value production is ended is set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124, and the set value production is performed. Finish the process.

  When the set value effect end command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 sets the set value suggesting background image G140. From the normal background images G111 to G113 before execution of the set value effect, and the set value effect is ended.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, since the set value effect that can suggest or notify the set value is executed based on the number of hooks, the gaming interest is improved, and the game motivation without winning the jackpot Even though the decline of the game, you can get interested in games. Furthermore, as the number of hooks increases, possible setting values are narrowed down and it becomes easier to guess the setting values, so that the effect of setting value production is improved.

(Modification of the seventh embodiment)
In the seventh embodiment, the setting value effect is executed by displaying the setting value suggesting background image G140 on the display unit 50a. However, as an effect mode of the setting value effect, the type of the image is set to the setting value suggesting background image G140. It is not limited and may be set appropriately. Further, as the effect form of the set value effect, the set value effect may be executed using another effect device such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the panel movable device 55 in place of or in addition to the image. .

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the setting value is suggested or notified by the number of continuations of the setting value effect. However, the elements that can be suggested or notified are not limited to the number of continuations and may be set as appropriate. For example, a plurality of image types related to the set value effect may be set, and the set value may be suggested or notified depending on the type of image that appears when the number of hooks is a predetermined number.

  Furthermore, the number of hooks at which the set value effect is executed, the number of times the set value effect is continued, the selection rate of the number of times to continue for each set value may be set as appropriate.

  In the seventh embodiment, the determination of the number of times of continuation is performed at the start of the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the set value effect starts when the special symbol determination time elapses after the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 stop. However, the execution timing of the continuation count determination and the start timing of the set value effect may be set as appropriate. For example, after the determination of the number of continuations is performed, the set value effect may be started when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variably displayed, and the set value suggestion zone may be entered. Alternatively, the set value effect may be started in the middle of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, such as when reach is established, and the set value suggestion zone may be entered.

  In the seventh embodiment, the special figure fluctuation display related to the number of hooks for executing the set value production is counted only in the special figure fluctuation display in the normal production mode, but the probability variation production mode and the short-time production mode are counted. The special figure fluctuation display at the time may also be counted.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the eighth embodiment, when a setting value that is most advantageous to the player is set, that is, when a setting value with the highest jackpot probability is set, in the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds, the setting value There may be a set value effect that suggests that is set. In the eighth embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Moreover, the same code | symbol and term are used about the structure same as basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  As described in the basic embodiment, various types of jackpot symbols are provided in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, six types of jackpot symbols, jackpot symbol D to jackpot symbol I, are provided as jackpot symbols according to special figure 2.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol D is 10, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol E is 10, and the round of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol F The number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol G is six, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol H is four, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol I is 6 times.

  In the following, the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol D is “fourth jackpot game”, the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol E is “fifth jackpot game”, the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol F is “sixth jackpot game”, The jackpot game related to jackpot symbol G is “seventh jackpot game”, the jackpot game related to jackpot symbol H is “eighth jackpot game”, the jackpot game related to jackpot symbol I is “9th jackpot game”,

  Further, in the round game of the fourth jackpot game to the ninth jackpot game, the opening time of the big winning opening 14 is set to 29.5 seconds and the closing time is set to 2.0 seconds. Also, as shown in FIG. 80, the gaming state set after the fourth jackpot game to the eighth jackpot game is a high probability high base gaming state, the high probability prescribed number is 160 times, and the short-time prescribed number is 160 times. Is set. On the other hand, the game state set after the ninth jackpot game is the low probability high base game state, and the prescribed number of time reductions is set to 100 times.

  Then, in the fourth jackpot game, it is suggested that the number of rounds is 10, and a jackpot game effect dedicated to the fifth jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, in the fifth jackpot game to the ninth jackpot game, a jackpot game effect called a so-called “rank-up bonus” is executed. In the rank-up bonus, for example, the number of round games, in other words, the maximum number of winning balls that a player can obtain is not known before the start of the jackpot game. By performing the effect of whether or not the number of prize balls is ranked up (increased), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  The number of rounds of the 5th jackpot game to the 9th jackpot game is 4, 6, 8, and 10, and at the end of the 4th round, an effect is given as to whether the round game will continue after the 4th round. Is called. And if it is the 5th big hit game-the 7th big hit game, and the 9th big hit game, the effect whether a round game will continue after the 6th round is performed at the end of 6 rounds. In the case of the fifth big hit game to the sixth round game, an effect of whether or not the round game is continued after the 8th round is performed at the end of the 8th round.

  For example, when the round game of the fifth jackpot game to the ninth jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), a video in which the favorite character singer sings the song A as the background image G201 for the round on the display unit 50a. Is displayed, and the song A flows from the speaker 52. When the fourth round ends, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the singer finishes singing the song A and is immersed in the afterglow. The scene immersed in this reverberation constitutes the effect of whether or not the round game will continue.

  And if it is the 8th big hit game, since the round game ends here, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), after a while, the ending is entered and as shown in FIG. 81 (D). Then, after suggesting that the singer bows and the round game is ended, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), the above-mentioned ending image G5 and the total prize ball number image G6 are displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the fifth jackpot game to the seventh jackpot game, and the ninth jackpot game, the round game continues, so after a short while, the round 5 starts and as shown in FIG. 82 (A). Then, the singer begins to sing another song B.

  Also, from the 5th round to the 6th round, as in the case of the 1st round to the 4th round, a video of the singer singing the song B flows, and when the 6th round ends, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the singer Finishes singing song B and immerses himself in the afterglow. If it is the seventh jackpot game and the ninth jackpot game, the round game ends here, and after a short time, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), as in the case of the eighth jackpot game. The ending is performed. On the other hand, in the case of the fifth jackpot game to the sixth jackpot game, the round game is continued, and after a short while, the round 7 is started and, as shown in FIG. Start singing another song C.

  Furthermore, in the same way from the 7th round to the 8th round, a video of the singer singing the song C flows, and when the 8th round ends, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the singer finishes singing the song C and reverberates. Immerse. If it is the sixth jackpot game, the round game ends here. As in the case of the eighth jackpot game, etc., after a while, the ending is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (B). Is called. On the other hand, in the case of the fifth jackpot game, the round game continues, so after a while, the round 9 is started and, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the singer plays another song D. Start singing. Then, when the 10th round is over, after the singer finishes singing the song D and immerses it in the afterglow, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), as in the case of the eighth jackpot game, etc. Ending is executed.

  In this way, in the fifth jackpot game to the ninth jackpot game, after the singer finishes singing the song and immerses it in a lingering sound, the bow is bowed or the song is started again. Here, the scene where the singer has finished singing the song and is immersed in the afterglow constitutes a continuous branch effect indicating whether or not the round game is continued. In addition, the bowing scene constitutes a continuation failure effect suggesting that the round game does not continue. On the other hand, the scene where the singing starts again constitutes a continuous success effect that suggests that the round game will continue.

  The period of time after the singer has finished singing and bowing, and the period of time after the singer has finished singing and starting to sing another song, Specifically, it is a period of closing after the big prize opening 14 is opened in the 4th, 6th, 8th, and 10th rounds. And the time of this period is longer than the closing time after opening of the big prize opening 14 in 1st to 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, and 9th round.

  Next, a blessing effect executed in the first round of the fifth jackpot game will be described. The blessing effect is an effect suggesting that the number of rounds is maximum in the rank-up bonus. There are three types of blessings. The first is a normal blessing effect that can be executed at any set value. The second is a high setting value suggestion blessing effect that can be executed when the setting value is 4 to 6 and suggests a relatively high setting value. The third is a maximum setting value suggestion blessing effect that can be executed when the setting value is 6, and suggests that it is the highest setting value.

  Here, specific examples of the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, and the maximum setting value suggesting blessing effect will be described. First, the normal blessing production will be explained. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), in one round, a singer who likes the main character appears and starts to sing song A.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 84B, the first effect button operation effective period as described in the basic embodiment occurs, and the first effect button operation with the first effect button operation promotion image G12 occurs. A promotion effect is executed. When the first effect button 40k is operated during the first effect button operation effective period, any blessing effect may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 84C, the normal blessing effect is composed of a movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment. Specifically, the movable board 55k is lowered to the operating position in front view, the rotating member 55k1 is rotated, and the normal effect image G13 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a.

  Further, the high setting value suggestion blessing effect is also configured to include the movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment, but further effects are also included. Specifically, FIG. 84 (D) panel movable body 55k descends to the operating position in front view, and rotating member 55k1 rotates. Furthermore, in addition to the normal effect image G13 being displayed on the entire display unit 50a, a specific sound effect (for example, “Cuincuin”) is output from the speaker 52 in a separate system from the song A. This is different from the normal blessing effect in that a specific sound effect (for example, “cure cure”) is output from the speaker 52.

  Further, the maximum set value suggestion blessing effect is also configured to include the movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment, but further effects are also included. Specifically, the panel movable body 55k descends to the operating position in front view, and the rotating member 55k1 rotates. Furthermore, a special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and a specific sound effect (for example, “cure quine”) is output from the speaker 52 in a system different from the music piece A. A specific sound effect (for example, “cure quinn”) is output from the speaker 52, and the special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, which is different from the normal blessing effect. Moreover, it differs from the high setting value suggestion blessing effect in that the special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a.

  When the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, and the maximum setting value suggesting blessing effect are not executed, the first effect button operation is performed even if the first effect button 40k is operated during the first effect button operation effective period. The round background image G201 is displayed as it is simply by the disappearance of the promotion image G12.

  Further, the normal blessing effect, the high set value suggesting blessing effect, and the highest set value suggesting blessing effect are performed for 5 seconds. When these effects are completed, the board movable body 55k returns to the standby state, the specific sound effect disappears, and the normal effect image G13 or the special effect image G16 returns to the round background image G201 where the singer sings the song A.

  As described above, the normal blessing production, the high set value suggestion blessing production, and the maximum set value suggestion blessing production may be executed. Whether or not to execute the blessing production, and which blessing production is executed. Is determined by the blessing effect determination for determining whether or not the blessing effect can be executed and the type of the blessing effect when it is executed. The blessing effect determination is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 using the blessing effect determination table. The blessing effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 (A), 85 (B), 86 (A), and 86 (B), the blessing effect determination table is associated with the set value. That is, the blessing effect determination table used in the blessing effect determination differs depending on the set value. Furthermore, the blessing effect determination table associated with the set value is associated with the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the continuous chain. In other words, the blessing effect determination table used in the blessing effect determination also varies depending on the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the continuous chain.

  In this way, the blessing effect determination table is associated with the set value and the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the continuous chain. Then, the type of the blessing effect to be executed and the selection rate of the non-execution of the blessing effect are set according to the combination of the set value and the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in the chain.

  For example, if the set value is “6”, execution of the normal blessing effect, execution of the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, execution of the highest setting value suggesting reduction effect, and non-execution of the blessing effect can be selected. If the set value is “4” and the set value is “5”, execution of the normal blessing effect, execution of the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, and non-execution of the blessing effect can be selected. Further, if the set value is “1” to the set value “3”, execution of the normal blessing effect and non-execution of the blessing effect can be selected.

  In the case of the setting value “4” to the setting value “6”, the selection rate for the execution of the high setting value effect increases as the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the continuous chain increases. Further, in the case of the set value “6”, as the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the continuous chain increases, the selection rate for the execution of the highest set value effect increases. In addition, with respect to the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in the same chain, the selection rate for the execution of the high set value effect increases as the set value increases.

  Next, in the eighth embodiment, an example of a blessing effect process performed for the effect control microcomputer 121 to execute a blessing effect will be described with reference to FIG. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 can perform the blessing effect process shown in FIG. 87 after step S4203 in the 10 ms timer interruption process of step S4012.

  In the blessing effect process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines in step S5501 whether one round of the fifth big hit game is being executed. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that one round of the fifth jackpot game has not been executed, it ends the blessing effect process, and if it determines that one round of the fifth jackpot game has been executed, the process proceeds to step S5502.

  In step S5502, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the first effect button operation valid period is currently in effect and the first effect button 40k has been operated in the first effect button operation effective period. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that it is not the first effect button operation effective period or the first effect button operation effective period but the first effect button 40k is not operated, the blessing effect process ends. On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the first effect button operation is valid and the first effect button 40k is operated during the first effect button operation valid period, the process proceeds to step S5503.

  In step S5503, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a blessing effect determination table associated therewith based on the set value indicated by the set value flag and the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in the continuous chain.

  Although not shown, for example, when the opening control microcomputer 121 receives an opening command indicating the jackpot symbol E related to the fifth jackpot game, it is provided in a predetermined area of the rendering RAM 124 in the opening effect start process. The fifth jackpot game execution number counter is incremented by “1”. Thereby, the production control microcomputer 121 can count the number of times of execution of the fifth big hit game in the chain. The fifth big hit game execution number counter is cleared when the high probability high base game state or the low probability high base game state shifts to the low probability low base game state without going through the big hit.

  Next, in step S5504, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the blessing effect determination random number counter as a blessing effect determination random number. In step S5505, the acquired blessing effect determination random number is selected. The blessing effect is determined by collating with the determination table.

  In each blessing effect determination table, random values for blessing effect determination (blessing effects) are performed when various blessing effects are executed or when the blessing effects are not executed so that the selection rates (%) shown in FIGS. Judgment value). The random number counter for blessing effect determination is provided in the effect RAM 124 and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process in step S4003.

  In step S5506, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the result of the blessing effect determination is execution of any blessing effect. If the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that it is not the execution of the blessing effect, it ends the blessing performance as it is, and if it is determined that the execution of any of the blessing effects is performed, in step S5507, the blessing effect indicating the type and content of the blessing effect. The start command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the blessing effect process ends. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5503 once in the fifth jackpot game, and thereafter does not perform the blessing effect process.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, in the jackpot game with the maximum number of rounds, a high setting value that indicates that the setting value is relatively high by using a blessing effect that indicates that the number of rounds is the maximum. Since the suggested blessing effect and the highest set value suggesting blessing effect that suggests that the set value is the highest are executed, the gaming interest can be improved and the player's willingness to play can be further enhanced. Further, as the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the continuous chain increases, the high set value effect and the maximum set value effect are easily executed, so that the player's willingness to play can be further increased.

(Modification of the eighth embodiment)
The specific content of the set value effect is not limited to the eighth embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. Further, although the high setting value effect and the maximum setting value effect are executed using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the panel movable device 55, the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the panel movable device 55 are used instead. Alternatively, in addition to the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the panel movable device 55, another effect device such as a frame lamp 53 may be used to execute the high set value effect and the maximum set value effect. Moreover, you may change the kind of effect apparatus to be used with the high setting value effect and the highest setting value effect.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the blessing effect determination is performed based on the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chunks, but the mere consecutive number of times including the number of executions of the jackpot game other than the fifth jackpot game is also included. Based on this, a blessing effect determination may be performed. In addition, the blessing effect determination may be performed based on the number of executions of the jackpot game with the maximum number of round games executed without being limited to the continuous game.

  Furthermore, only one of the high set value effect and the maximum set value effect may be executable. The high set value effect can be executed with the set value “4” to the set value “6”, but may be executed with the set value “5” to the set value “6”. Further, in the case of the set value “1” to the set value “3” or the set value “1” to the set value “2”, it is possible to execute a low set value effect that suggests that the set value is relatively low. You may be able to do it.

  Further, the execution timing of the blessing effect is not limited to the eighth embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. For example, a blessing effect may be executed during a round game after two rounds. Further, a blessing effect may be executed at the opening. Further, in the special figure variation effect, the blessing effect may be executed after it is informed that it is a big hit before the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. Further, the execution timing of the blessing effect is not limited to one, and a plurality of timings may be set. Also, the number of blessing effects is not limited to one, and a plurality of patterns may be set.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the ninth embodiment, the set value effect suggesting the set value is executed using the display mode at the start of the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on. In the ninth embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Moreover, the same code | symbol and term are used about the structure same as basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  First, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the power is turned on, a predetermined combination of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed on the display unit 50a in a stopped state. For example, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), it is assumed that the combination of “left effect symbol EZ1, middle effect symbol EZ2, right effect symbol EZ3” is “3.2.4”. And in this state, when the first special figure fluctuation display after power-on is started, the fluctuation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started accordingly.

  Here, the display mode at the start of the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can be set as appropriate. For example, as a normal display mode in which the set value production is not performed, FIG. 88 (B) to FIG. As shown in C), the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the stopped state can be moved downward as they are. Hereinafter, the display mode at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is referred to as a “normal start mode”.

  It should be noted that the order in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start to change can be set as appropriate. For example, the three effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can start to fluctuate simultaneously. It is also possible to start to change in the order of left effect symbol EZ1 → right effect symbol EZ3 → middle effect symbol EZ2.

  In the ninth embodiment, if the set value is the same as the set value that was set when the power supply voltage was previously applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and does not change, the first effect after the power is turned on In the variable display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start the variable display in the normal start mode. Therefore, the fact that the variation display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts in the normal start mode changes that the set value is the same as the set value that was set when the power supply voltage was previously applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Suggests not. In the following, the set value that was set when the power supply voltage was previously applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is referred to as “previous set value”.

  On the other hand, if the set value is different from the previous set value, that is, if the set value has been changed since the last time the power voltage was applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on , The design symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are different from the normal start mode as shown in FIGS. 89 (B) to 89 (C) from the initial stop state after power-on as shown in FIG. 89 (A). The variable display is started in the first special start mode. Specifically, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been stopped move downward after repeatedly performing a small reciprocating motion in the left-right direction at the start of the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on. The small reciprocating motion in the left-right direction at the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 constitutes the “first special start mode” at the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Then, the fact that the change display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts in the first special start mode suggests that the set value has changed from the previous time.

  In addition, when the set value is higher than the previous set value, in the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are first stopped after the power is turned on as shown in FIG. From the state, as shown in FIGS. 90B to 90C, the variable display is started in a second special start mode different from the normal start mode and the first special start mode. Specifically, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been stopped move downward after repeatedly performing small reciprocating motions in the left-right direction and the up-down direction at the start of the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on. The small reciprocating motion in the left-right direction at the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 constitutes the “second special start mode” at the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Therefore, starting the variation display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the second special start mode suggests that the set value is higher than the previous set value and has changed from the previous time.

  It should be noted that the order in which the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 move downward when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 perform variable display in the first special start mode or the second special start mode can be set as appropriate.

  As described above, since the display mode at the start of the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after power-on is set based on the current set value and the previous set value, the player can It is possible to roughly grasp the relationship between the current set value and the previous set value.

  Although the details will be described later, when the set value is higher than the previous set value, when the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start the variable display in the second special start mode, the variable display is displayed in the second special start mode. There is a time to start in the first special start mode without starting. The probability that the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start the variable display in the second special start mode increases as the current set value increases.

  In the following description, the normal start mode, the first special start mode, and the second special start mode are collectively referred to as “effect design variation start mode”. Moreover, starting the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the first special start mode is referred to as “first set value effect”. Moreover, starting the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the second special start mode is referred to as “second set value effect”. The first set value effect and the second set value effect are collectively referred to as “set value effect”.

  In the ninth embodiment, the first set value effect and the second set value effect are not executed using the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 smaller than the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Therefore, the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is started in the same manner regardless of whether or not the set value is the same as the previous set value.

  Next, an example of processing for determining whether or not to execute a set value effect will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, this process is referred to as a set value effect determination process. As the setting value effect determination process, for example, the effect control microcomputer 121 uses the effect map microcomputer 124 for the effect map change effect pattern command representing the effect map change effect pattern in the effect map start effect process in step S4306. This can be done after setting the predetermined area.

  As a premise of the set value effect determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 had previously supplied power supply voltage to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 based on the backup data in addition to the set value designation command in the game control main process. It is assumed that a previous set value designation command indicating the set value that has been set at that time is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Then, when receiving the previous set value designation command, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the previous set value data indicating the set value indicated by the previous set value designation command in the previous set value data area provided in the effect RAM 124. It shall be remembered.

  In the setting value effect determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation effect to be started is the first special figure fluctuation effect after the power is turned on in step S5601. It is determined whether or not the special figure variation effect execution completed flag is ON.

  When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure variation effect is not the first special effect after the power is turned on, that is, the special figure variation effect execution flag is ON, the set value effect determination process ends and the special figure change effect starts. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that it is the first special figure variation effect after the power is turned on, that is, the special figure variation effect execution flag has not been turned ON, the process proceeds to step S5602.

  In step S5602, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a special figure variation effect execution completion flag indicating that the first special figure change effect after power-on is executed in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and proceeds to step S5603.

  In step S5603, the production control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag and the previous set value data to determine whether or not the current set value is the same as the previous set value. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the current set value is the same as the previous set value, the set value effect determination process ends and the process returns to the special figure change effect start process. On the other hand, if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the current set value is not the same as the previous set value, the process proceeds to step S5604.

  Next, in step S5604, the production control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag and the previous set value data to determine whether or not the current set value is higher than the previous set value. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the current set value is not higher than the previous set value, the process proceeds to step S5610, whereas if it determines that the current set value is higher than the previous set value, the process proceeds to step S5605.

  In step S5605, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the second set value effect determination table. The second set value effect determination table is a data table used when performing the second set value effect determination for determining whether or not to execute the second set value effect. As shown in FIG. 92, the second set value effect determination table is associated with the set value. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 refers to the set value flag stored in the effect RAM 124 and selects the second set value effect determination table associated with the set value.

  In each second set value effect determination table, the second set value effect determination random number (second set value) is set to indicate whether or not the second set value effect can be executed, so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 92 is obtained. Production determination value) is distributed. As shown in FIG. 92, the probability that it is determined that the second set value effect is executed increases as the set value increases. The second set value effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123. Further, when the set value is “1”, the selection rate for the execution of the second set value effect is 0% because it cannot be higher than the previous set value.

  Next, in step S5606, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the second set value effect determination random number counter as the second set value effect determination random number, and in step S5607, the acquired second set value effect. The second set value effect determination is performed by collating the determination random number with the second set value effect determination table selected in step S5605. The second set value effect determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124 and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process in step S4003.

  Subsequently, in step S5608, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the second set value effect as a result of the second set value effect determination. When it is determined that the second set value effect is not to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5610, whereas when it is determined that the second set value effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S5609.

  In step S5609, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the second set value effect start command indicating the effect contents of the second set value effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, finishes the set value effect determination process, Return to the variation production start process. On the other hand, in step S5610, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a first set value effect start command indicating the effect contents of the first set value effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and finishes the set value effect determination process. Return to the special figure variation effect start process.

  When the second set value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is turned on. The second set value effect is executed at the start of the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Specifically, the image CPU 141 starts the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the second special start mode.

  When the first set value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is turned on. The first set value effect is executed at the start of the subsequent display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Specifically, the image CPU 141 starts the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the first special start mode.

  When the set value and the previous set value are the same, the first set value effect command or the second set value effect command is not transmitted to the image control board 140. Therefore, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the fluctuation display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on in the normal start mode.

  Thus, the set value effect may be executed, so that the player can recognize what state the current set value is with respect to the previous set value. That is, it can be estimated whether or not the set value has been changed since the power supply voltage was previously applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Basically, the power supply voltage of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is cut off when the game shop is closed, and the power supply voltage of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on before starting the next day. Therefore, the setting value of the previous day can be compared with the setting value of the day depending on whether or not the setting value effect is executed. And since the information regarding the set value can be obtained by the presence / absence of execution of the set value effect, the player is made to pay attention when starting the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on. The effect of changing display of EZ3 can be improved.

  Furthermore, there are two types of set value effects, a first set value effect and a second set value effect, which have different functions and suggest different information regarding the set value. It is possible to make the user pay attention when starting the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on, and to improve the effect of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3.

(Modification of the ninth embodiment)
The production mode of the first set value production and the second set value production, that is, the first special start mode and the second special start mode are not limited to the ninth embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. The production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be variably displayed in a mode different from the first special start mode and the second special start mode. Also, instead of at the start of the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, a set value production that provides information on the set value using the display mode of the variation display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 at the time of reach establishment or stoppage. May be executed.

  Further, the set value effect may be performed by the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 other than the variable effect display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on. For example, after turning on the power supply voltage to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, for example, the set value effect may be executed by using a variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 a predetermined number of times such as the first ten times after the power is turned on. This number may be set to one or more. Further, the set value effect may be executed using the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a predetermined period after a predetermined time has elapsed after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

  Furthermore, the set value effect may be executed based on the change amount of the set value from the previous day set value. For example, when the first set value effect is executed, as the change amount increases from the previous day set value, the movement width in the left-right direction is increased, the movement speed is increased, or the number of movements is increased. The first set value effect may be executed. In addition, when executing the second set value effect, as the amount of change from the previous day set value increases, the moving width of at least one of the left and right directions and the up and down direction is increased, the moving speed is increased, or the number of movements is increased. For example, the second set value effect may be executed in association with the change amount.

  In the ninth embodiment, the set value effect is executed using the image display device 50. In addition to the image display device 50 or instead of the image display device 50, a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, and The set value effect may be executed using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the panel movable device 55. An effect device other than the image display device 50 may be used for either the first set value effect and the second set value effect, or only one of them. Furthermore, when both the first set value effect and the second set value effect are executed using an effect device other than the image display device 50, the effect mode of the effect device other than the image display device 50 is the first set value effect. And the second set value effect may be the same or different.

  In the ninth embodiment, the first set value effect and the second set value effect are executed using the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Instead, they are executed using the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. May be. Alternatively, the first set value effect and the second set value effect may be executed using the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. Furthermore, any one of the first set value effects and the second set value effects is executed using any one of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ1. Any one of the first set value effect and the second set value effect may be executed using either one of KZ3.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the tenth embodiment, a small hit that is not provided in the basic embodiment is provided. The small hit is one of the determination results of the big hit determination. That is, in the jackpot determination, any one of the jackpot, the jackpot, and the loss is selected. As a result, the probability of loss differs depending on the set value, and the set value is suggested depending on the frequency of occurrence of the loss. In addition, the same code | symbol and term are used about the structure same as basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  First, the jackpot determination table used in the jackpot determination will be described. The jackpot determination table of the tenth embodiment is different from the jackpot determination table shown in the basic embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 93A to 93C and FIGS. 94A to 94C, the jackpot determination table of the tenth embodiment is associated with a set value.

  Furthermore, the jackpot determination table associated with the set value is also associated with the type of start port where the winning due to the jackpot determination is performed, that is, the type of special figure that is the target of variable display performed based on the jackpot determination. ing. In the following, the jackpot determination table associated with the special figure 1 is referred to as a “first jackpot determination table”, and the jackpot determination table associated with the special figure 2 is referred to as a “second jackpot determination table”.

  The first jackpot determination table and the second jackpot determination table are also associated with the gaming state. That is, each first jackpot determination table includes a first jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state and a first jackpot determination table used in a high probability state. On the other hand, each second jackpot determination table includes a second jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state and a second jackpot determination table used in a high probability state.

  In each jackpot determination table, special symbol random number determination values are appropriately assigned to the jackpot, the jackpot, and the loss as the jackpot determination result. Details of the selection ratios for jackpots, jackpots, and loses in the jackpot determination table will be described later.

  Further, the gaming state set after the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment is also different from that in the basic embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol A is a high probability high base gaming state. At this time, the high probability prescribed number is 160 times, and the short-time prescribed number is 160. Is set to times. Further, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol B is a high probability low base gaming state, and the high probability prescribed count at this time is 160 times. On the other hand, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C is a low probability low base gaming state. That is, if the jackpot symbol C is won, the gaming state is not advantageous to the player except that the jackpot game is executed.

  The gaming state after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol D and the jackpot symbol E is a high probability high base gaming state, in which the high probability prescribed number is set to 160 times and the short-time prescribed number is set to 160 times. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol F is a low probability high base gaming state, and the prescribed number of time reductions at this time is 100 times.

  Also, the effect mode set after the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment is partly different from that in the basic embodiment. A slightly different point from the case of the basic embodiment is that when a high probability low base gaming state or a low probability low base gaming state is set after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol C In other words, a latent mode is set to make it difficult to determine whether the high probability low base gaming state or the low probability low base gaming state is set.

  The latent mode is the longest, until the special probability variable display of the high probability specified number of times related to the jackpot symbol B is executed without winning the jackpot after the high probability low base gaming state is set, or the low probability low base The game state is continued until the special figure variable display of the high-probability prescribed number of times related to the jackpot symbol B is executed without winning the jackpot.

  Further, the special figure variation pattern determination table is different from that in the basic embodiment due to the provision of the small hits. The special figure fluctuation pattern related to the small hit can be set as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 97, in the case of the small hit, a special figure fluctuation pattern similar to the case of the loss can be selected. When winning a small hit, reach determination is performed in the same manner as in the case of losing, and the special figure variation pattern determination table is distinguished by the presence or absence of reach.

  Specifically, as the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits with reach related to the non-time-short state, and the special figure 1 for small hits without reach related to the non-time-short state. Fluctuation pattern determination table, special figure 2 for small hits related to short-time gaming state, fluctuation pattern determination table, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits with non-short time state, reach, small hits without reach related to non-short time state There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for use, and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for small hits related to the short-time gaming state.

  Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for reach with small hits related to the non-time-short state includes the special figure 1 fluctuation for small hits with no reach used when the special figure 1 holding number (U1) is 0 to 2. There are a pattern judgment table and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for small hits with no reach used when the special figure 1 holding number (U1) is 3-4. Similarly, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for reach with small hits related to the non-time-short state, the special figure 2 for small hit with no reach used when the special figure 2 holding number (U2) is 0-2. There are a fluctuation pattern determination table and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for reachless small hits used when the special figure 2 holding number (U2) is 3 to 4.

  If it is determined that there is a reach in the special figure 1 lottery in the non-short-time state and it is determined that there is a reach, the SP loss fluctuation, the L loss fluctuation, and the N loss fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation time, and the production flow are the same. Any one of hit variation, L small hit variation, and N small hit variation is selected.

  In addition, if it is determined that there is no reach in the special drawing 1 lottery in the non-short-time state and it is determined that there is no reach, the normal A loss fluctuation, the normal B loss fluctuation, the normal C loss fluctuation and the special figure fluctuation time, and the production flow Any one of the normal A small hit variation, the normal B small hit variation, and the normal C small hit variation is selected.

  In addition, when winning a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery in the short-time state, a shortened B small hit variation having the same shortening B loss variation, special drawing variation time, and production flow is selected regardless of the presence or absence of reach. This is because, as will be described later, the probability of hitting in the special drawing 2 lottery is very low compared to the loss.

  When winning a small hit, the special figure indicating the small hit is finally stopped and displayed in the special figure variable display. When the fixed time starts after the special figure stops in a mode showing the small hit, the small hit game is played. In addition, the special figure which stopped in the aspect which shows a small hit is a small hit symbol, The role respond | corresponds to a big hit symbol and a lost symbol. Next, the small hit game will be described. In the tenth embodiment, only one type of small hit symbol is provided, but a plurality of types may be set.

  The small hit game consists of an open game with opening and closing of the big prize opening 14, an opening from the start of the small hit game until the start of the first open game (also expressed as OP), and the final open game. And the ending (also referred to as ED) from the end to the end of the small hit game. Each open game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous open game, and ends with the start of the next open game or the start of the ending. Note that OP and ED can be omitted.

  And the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the tenth embodiment controls the small hit game using the small hit game control table. In the tenth embodiment, only one type of small hit game is provided, but a plurality of types may be set in association with a plurality of types of small hit symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the small hit game control table, elements constituting the small hit game (small hit game constituent elements) are stored. The small hit game components include the number of open games, the type and opening time of each winning game and the opening time (opening pattern), the time to close until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time) ), And ending time (ending time). When there are a plurality of types of small hit games, it is possible to set a small hit game component for each type of small hit game.

  In the small hit game of the tenth embodiment shown in FIG. 98, the open game is played twice. In each open game, the big prize opening 14 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In addition, the closing time of the big prize opening 14 between each open game is 2.0 seconds. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small hit game to the start of the first open game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big prize opening 14 is maintained for 0.5 seconds from the end of the last open game to the end of the small hit game.

  Next, a description will be given of differences from the basic embodiment in the processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 due to the provision of small hits. The processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 in the tenth embodiment mainly includes special operation processing, special figure 1 determination processing, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing, special figure 2 determination processing, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing, And the special symbol confirmation processing is different from the basic embodiment. First, the special operation process will be described.

  The special action process includes a small hit game control process. The small hit game control process is associated with the special operation status “6” and is performed as step S1507 when the special operation status “6” is set. The “special operation status” is set to “1” by default. The process of setting the special operation status to “6” will be described later.

  The game control microcomputer 101 performs a small hit game according to the aforementioned small hit game control table by performing a small hit game control process. Note that the game control microcomputer 101 indicates an ending according to the small hit symbol related to the small hit game when all the open games are ended and the ending is started in the small hit game control process. The ending command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special operation status to “1” when the small hit game ends in the small hit game control process.

  Next, the special figure 1 determination process will be described. In the special figure 1 determination process, the special symbol random number stored first in the special figure 1 holding storage unit 105a is read out and stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current set value and gaming state. Based on this, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit or a loss.

  As described above, since the jackpot determination table is associated with the set value, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the first jackpot determination table associated with the set current set value. Further, since the first jackpot determination table is also associated with the gaming state, the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines the first jackpot determination associated with the normal probability state in the first jackpot determination table associated with the set value. The table or the first jackpot determination table associated with the high probability state is selected. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot determination in which a special symbol random number is checked against the selected first jackpot determination table.

  Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 101 further reads the jackpot symbol random number and performs a jackpot symbol type determination (jackpot symbol type determination) based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table. . Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the symbol design data indicating the loss is set in the special buffer, and the symbol designating command indicating the loss is set in the output buffer. Alternatively, if the result of the big hit determination is “small hit”, the small hit symbol data representing the small hit is set in the special figure buffer, and the symbol designation command representing the small hit is set in the output buffer.

  Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 shows special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing in the tenth embodiment. 100 are the same as steps S1651 to S1654, steps S1655 to S1658, and steps S1659 to S1662 of the basic embodiment. is there. The differences from the basic embodiment of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process of the tenth embodiment will be described below.

  In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process of the tenth embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1654 that the jackpot determination result is not “big jackpot” (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655 and the jackpot determination result. Is determined to be “small hit”. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1655 that the big hit determination result is not “small win” (NO in S1655), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1658 to perform reach determination related to the loss.

  On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1655 that the big hit determination result is “small win” (YES in S1655), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1656 and, as in the case of reach determination related to loss, Such reach determination is performed. Note that the same reach determination table is used for the reach determination related to the small hit and the reach determination related to the loss.

  Subsequently, in step S1657, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the reach determination result is “with reach”. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reach determination result is not “with reach” (NO in S1657), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1662 to select the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for small reach without reach, and then step The process proceeds to S1665. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reach determination result is “with reach” (YES in S1657), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1663 to select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach with small hit. To step S1665.

  After proceeding to step S1665, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the same processing as in the basic embodiment.

  Also, the special figure 2 determination process is basically the same except that the table used for jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table and the table used for jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since this is the same process as the special figure 1 determination process, its description is omitted. Also, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process is basically the same process as the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process except that the table used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment is the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 shows special symbol confirmation processing in the tenth embodiment. Steps S1751 to S1761 and S1765 in FIG. 100 are the same as S1751 to S1761 and S1762 in the basic embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the basic embodiment of the special symbol determination process of the tenth embodiment will be described.

  In the special symbol determination process of the tenth embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1758 that the jackpot symbol has stopped (NO in S1758), the process proceeds to step S1762, and whether or not the jackpot symbol has stopped. Determine. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S 1762 that the small winning symbol has not stopped (NO in S 1762), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S 1765, changes the special operation status to “1”, and ends the special symbol determination process. .

  On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S 1762 that the small hit symbol has stopped (YES in S 1762), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S 1763 to perform a small hit game preparation process, and in step S 1764 the special operation status is “6”. The special symbol confirmation process is finished.

  The game control microcomputer 101 sets a small hit game control table in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the small hit game preparation process. Also, a small hitting opening flag indicating that the small hitting game is being opened is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the opening time of the small hitting game (the first open game is started after the small hitting game is started). Is set in the special operation timer. Furthermore, an opening command indicating the opening of the small hit is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

  Next, the selection ratio of the big hit, the small hit and the loss in the big hit determination table will be described. As described above, in the jackpot determination table, special symbol determination values are appropriately allocated to the jackpot determination results, the jackpot determination, and the loss. As a result, the selection ratios of big hits, small hits, and loses in each jackpot determination table are as shown in FIG. In the following, the jackpot selection rate is referred to as “big hit probability”, the jackpot selection rate is referred to as “small hit probability”, and the loss selection rate is referred to as “lost probability”.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the jackpot probability is not different depending on the type of special figure related to the jackpot determination in the same gaming state in each set value. However, in each set value, the jackpot probability differs between the normal probability state and the high probability state even for the same special figure type. Specifically, the jackpot probability is set higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state regardless of the set value. In any jackpot probability state, the jackpot probability increases as the set value increases.

  In addition, the small hit probability does not differ depending on the gaming state as long as each set value has the same special figure type. However, in each set value, even if the same special figure type, the small hit probability varies depending on the special figure type related to the big hit determination. Specifically, the small hit probability is set higher in the special figure 1 than in the special figure 2 at any set value. Regardless of the set value, the small hit probability is set almost the same for each type of special figure.

  Further, each set value varies depending on the gaming state. The loss probability in the special figure 1 becomes lower as the set value becomes higher in any gaming state. In addition, the loss probability in FIG. 1 is higher in the normal probability state than in the high probability state at any set value. In other words, the high probability state is less likely to lose. Furthermore, the degree to which the probability of the loss becomes lower is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. On the other hand, the loss probability in FIG. 2 is substantially the same in the normal probability state and the high probability state. The loss probability in the special figure 2 is substantially the same regardless of the set value in any gaming state.

  Further, in any set value, the selection rate of the loss indicates a relationship of a special figure 2 in a normal probability state / a high probability state> a special figure 1 in a normal probability state> a special figure 1 in a high probability state.

  Here, regarding the special figure 1, the loss probability in the high probability state varies greatly depending on the set value. On the other hand, for Special Figure 1, the loss probability in the normal probability state is higher than the high probability state at any set value, but the difference due to the set value of the loss probability is smaller than the high probability state. Further, the loss probability in the special figure 2 is higher than the loss probability in the special figure 1 regardless of the set value. However, the difference due to the set value of the loss probability in the normal probability state according to FIG. 2 and the difference due to the set value of the loss probability in the high probability state according to FIG. It is overwhelmingly smaller than the difference due to the set value of the loss probability.

  Therefore, basically, in the high base game state where the entire game progresses by winning the game ball to the second starting port 12 and performing the variable display of the special figure 2, the set value is estimated by the occurrence frequency of the loss. It is difficult. On the other hand, in a low base game state where the entire game progresses by winning a game ball at the first start port 11 and performing variable display of FIG. It is easier than the gaming state. Even in the low base gaming state, the difference due to the set value of the loss probability is larger in the high probability state, so that it is easier to estimate the set value based on the occurrence frequency of the loss.

  In this way, the setting value is suggested based on the occurrence frequency of the undesired loss to the player, so that the player can be made aware of the loss. As a result, the player's satisfaction with the game can be reduced, and the game interest can be improved. Furthermore, since the accuracy of suggesting the set value varies depending on the game state, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to enhance the overall game. In particular, in the low base game state where it is relatively difficult to execute the special variable display, the accuracy of suggesting the set value based on the frequency of the occurrence of loss is higher, so it is possible to effectively prevent boredom in the game. Can do. In addition, in the high base game state in which it is relatively easy to execute the special figure variable display, the accuracy of suggesting the set value based on the occurrence frequency of the loss is lower, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in game entertainment.

  Further, in each set value, the probability of losing according to the special figure 1 is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state, so after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol B or jackpot symbol C is performed When a game is played in the same latent mode, the game state can be estimated based on the occurrence frequency of the loss. Thereby, amusement interest is improved.

(Modification of the tenth embodiment)
Specific values of the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability are not limited to the tenth embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. Further, the magnitude relationship of the loss probability in each set value is not limited to the tenth embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. For example, in each set value, the probability of loss may be set higher in the order of high probability state in FIG. 1> normal probability state in FIG. 1> normal probability state / high probability state in FIG. .

  Also, the magnitude relationship of the degree of difference depending on the set value of the loss probability is not limited to the tenth embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. For example, in the order of normal probability state of special figure 1> high probability state of special figure 1> normal probability state / high probability state of special figure 2 is set so that the degree of difference depending on the set value of the probability of loss increases. May be.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the eleventh embodiment, the set value can be set randomly. In addition, the same code | symbol and term are used about the structure same as basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the eleventh embodiment is provided with a set value setting method changeover switch 74 for setting the set values randomly. The set value setting method changeover switch 74 is constituted by a five-contact slide switch, and is provided in the vicinity of the set value switch 71 as shown in FIG.

  “Random setting OFF” in which the setting value is not set at random by the setting value setting method changeover switch 74, “Random setting A”, “Random setting B”, “Random setting C”, and “Random setting” in which the setting value is set at random. It can be switched to any one of “Setting D”. Specifically, the knob 74k constituting the operation unit of the setting value setting method changeover switch 74 can be slid in five stages. By the sliding operation of the knob 74k, “random setting OFF” and “random setting” are performed. It can be switched to any one of “A”, “Random Setting B”, “Random Setting C”, and “Random Setting D”.

  Details of “random setting A”, “random setting B”, “random setting C”, and “random setting D” will be described later, but “random setting A”, “random setting B”, and “random setting C”. And “Random setting D” have different selection ratios of setting values. In the following, “random setting OFF”, “random setting A”, “random setting B”, “random setting C”, and “random setting D” are methods for setting setting values. Collectively referred to as “value setting method”.

  The set value setting method changeover switch 74 is connected to a set value setting method changeover switch sensor 74a capable of detecting a slide operation of the knob 74k, that is, a change operation of the set value setting method. As shown in FIG. 104, the set value setting method changeover switch sensor 74 a is connected to the game control board 100.

  When the knob 74k is slid, the set value setting method changeover switch sensor 74a detects the position of the knob 74k, and outputs a detection signal indicating the position to the game control board 100. The position of the knob 74k is associated with each setting value setting method. Therefore, the detection signal indicating the position of the knob 74k substantially indicates the selected set value setting method.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a set value random number is provided in the same manner as the special symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the special symbol variation pattern random number. The set value random number is a random number (determination information) used in setting value setting method determination described later. The game RAM 104 is provided with a set value random number counter indicating a set value random number.

  The game control microcomputer 101 updates the counter value of the set value random number counter by 1 in the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process of step S12. When the counter value of the set value random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the range of the set value random number can be set as appropriate, but in the eleventh embodiment, it is set to 0 to 65535. The initial value of the set value random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed at random. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the same setting in the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing of step S103 as in the update processing of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information. The counter value of the value random number counter is incremented by 1 and updated. It is performed both in the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process and in other periods (the period from the end of the game control side timer interrupt process to the start of the next game control side timer interrupt process) . Note that the process of updating the counter value of the set value random number counter by adding 1 may be only one of step S12 and step S103.

  Next, setting value setting processing according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 shows a set value setting process in the eleventh embodiment. Step S51, step S53 to step S56, and step S63 in FIG. 105 are the same as step S51, step S52 to step S55, and step S56 of the basic embodiment.

  In the set value setting process of the eleventh embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the set value on the set value display 87 in step S51, and then in step S52, the set value setting method is switched by the set value setting method changeover switch 74. It is determined whether or not “Random setting OFF” is selected. If it is determined that “random setting OFF” is selected, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S53. If it is determined that “random setting OFF” is not selected, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S57. Since the process when proceeding to Step S53 is the same as Steps S52 to S56 in the basic embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  In step S57, the game control microcomputer 101 is associated with the set value setting method selected by the set value setting method changeover switch 74, specifically, any of the selected random setting A to random setting D. Select the set value judgment table. Here, the set value determination table will be described.

  The setting value determination table is a data table used for setting value determination for determining a setting value. The setting value determination table includes a setting value determination table (first setting value determination table) used when the random setting A is selected, and a setting value determination table (first setting) used when the random setting B is selected. 2 setting value determination table), a setting value determination table used when random setting C is selected (third setting value determination table), and a setting value determination table used when random setting D is selected ( There is a fourth set value determination table). In other words, the set value determination table is associated with the set value setting method. These set value determination tables are stored in the game ROM 103.

  Each set value determination table is configured such that each set value is selected at a predetermined selection rate. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 106, in each set value determination table, a set value random value determination value (set value random number determination value) is appropriately assigned to each set value at the selectivity shown in FIG. It is. The set value determination table is configured so that the probabilities of selecting each set value are different depending on the set value setting method (that is, random setting A to random setting D).

  In the first set value determination table, as the set value increases, the selectivity for the set value decreases. The selection rate for the set value “6” is set to “0”. That is, when the random setting A is selected, the setting value “6” is not selected. On the other hand, in the fourth set value determination table, as the set value increases, the selection rate for the set value increases. The selection rate for the set value “1” is set to “0”. That is, when the random setting D is selected, the setting value “1” is not selected.

  In the second set value determination table and the third set value determination table, the selection rates for the set value “1” and the set value “2” are the same, and the selection for the set value “3” and the set value “4” is selected. The rates are the same, and the selection rates for the set value “5” and the set value “6” are the same. In the case of the second set value determination table, as the set value increases, the selectivity for the set value decreases. On the other hand, in the case of the third set value determination table, as the set value increases, the selection rate for the set value increases.

  Unlike the first set value determination table and the fourth set value determination table, the second set value determination table and the third set value determination table are configured so that any set value can be selected. . Further, the second set value determination table and the third set value determination table are configured such that the difference in the selection rate is reduced depending on the set value as compared with the first set value determination table and the fourth set value determination table. Yes.

  Return the description to the setting value setting process. When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the set value determination table in step S57, next, in step S58, the game RAM 104 loads the counter value of the set value random number counter backed up as backup data to the set value random number. In Step S59, the set value random number indicated by the counter value is collated with the set value determination table selected in Step S57, and the set value is determined.

  Subsequently, in step S60, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the set value data indicating the set value determined in the set value determination in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104, and sets a new set value. In step S61, the set value is displayed on the set value display 87, and in step S62, it is determined whether or not there is an operation for determining the set value. The game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the same process until it is determined that there is an operation for determining the set value. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is an operation for confirming the set value, the process proceeds to step S63, where the set value designation command indicated by the set value data is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, Transmit to the control board 120.

  In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the eleventh embodiment, the set value can be set at random, so that the store clerk of the game shop operates the set value switch 71 for many pachinko gaming machines PY1. While reducing the labor for changing the value, the set value can be changed to improve the game entertainment. Further, since the set value can be arbitrarily set by selecting the random setting OFF with the set value setting method changeover switch 74, the functionality of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is improved. Furthermore, since there are a plurality of setting value setting methods for setting the setting values at random, it is possible to further reduce the deviation of the setting values.

(Modification of the eleventh embodiment)
In the eleventh embodiment, the set value can be set randomly, but the mechanism and processing for that purpose are not limited to the eleventh embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the set value setting method changeover switch 74 is constituted by a slide switch, but a switch may be used from other mechanisms such as a rotary switch and a dip switch.

  In addition, the type of setting value setting method for setting the setting value randomly and the selection rate of the setting value in each setting value determination table may be set as appropriate. Furthermore, the set value may be set at random by a method different from the set value determination.

7). Other Modification Examples Other modification examples of the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments will be described below.

  The structures of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, instead of the set value cylinder 70, a two-contact slide switch may be used as a machine that can perform an operation for changing the set value. In this case, when the knob is arranged at one position, an operation for changing the set value may be performed. Furthermore, instead of the set value switch 71, a rotary switch or a slide switch may be used as a machine for performing an operation for setting the set value. In this case, the position of the knob may be directly associated with the set value. The positions of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 are not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

  The configuration of the set value display 87 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, another display device such as a dot matrix LED display device may be used as a display device for displaying the set value. Further, the position of the set value display 87 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the set value display 87 may be arranged at a place not on the game control board 100.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game RAM 104 is cleared by operating the set value cylinder 70 to change the set value. However, the operation means for clearing the game RAM 104 is used. For example, the game RAM 104 may be cleared without performing an operation for changing the set value.

  Further, the set value confirming operation is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may be able to recognize the rotation operation to the handle 72k, and the setting value may be determined by the rotation operation of the handle 72k being performed. Alternatively, the operation of the so-called “ball rental button” and “return button” can be recognized by the game control microcomputer 101, and the set value is determined by the operation of these buttons. Also good.

  Further, six setting values “1” to “6” are provided as setting values, but the number of setting values is not limited to six and may be set as appropriate. Also, the identification information for the set value is not limited to numbers such as “1” to “6” but may be characters or other symbols such as “A” to “F”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the big winning opening 14 can be opened in the jackpot game, but in addition to the big winning opening 14, a winning area that can be opened in the big hit game may be provided.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a specific jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting condition for the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the grand prize winning device 14D, a second big prize winning device that can be opened and closed and that allows a game ball to enter when opened is provided at a position where the game ball in the gaming area 6 can reach, When a game ball that has entered the second grand prize-winning device in a predetermined round game and has entered the second grand prize-winning device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side of the game, a high probability state is reached with the end of the big hit game. May be set.

  In this case, for example, a specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second grand prize winning device opens for an easy time (for example, 29.5 seconds) and a second big prize winning device enter the ball. A non-specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set a high probability state) that opens for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. In addition, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the game balls won in the second grand prize winning device can pass, and a distribution device that distributes the game balls into the specific area and the non-specific areas is provided. And the opening time of the second big winning device is the same, but the combination of the opening mode of the second big winning device and the operating mode of the allocating device, the jackpot symbol and the high probability state that makes it easy to set the high probability state. It is also possible to provide a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the game control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the basic control related to the progress of the presentation according to the progress of the game (game control). As described above, the game control and the presentation control are performed on different boards, but may be configured to be performed on one board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

  Although the set value effects according to the first to eleventh embodiments can be executed in different scenes, the set value effects according to the first to eleventh embodiments are appropriately performed in one pachinko gaming machine PY1. It may be possible to execute.

  In addition, as long as there is no contradiction, the gaming machine of the present invention may be applied to other ball game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball game machine, a revolving game machine (so-called “slot machine”), and the like. Is possible.

8). Other Inventions Disclosed in Embodiments The following inventions A to J are disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in this [DETAILED DESCRIPTION]. In the description of the invention A to invention J, the names and expressions of the corresponding components in the embodiment for carrying out the invention described above, and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to the supplementary notes. The invention A is a generic name of the following inventions A1 to A6, the invention B is a generic name of the following inventions B1 to B5, the invention C is a generic name of the following inventions C1 to C8, and the invention D is The invention E is a generic name of the following inventions D1 to D4, the invention E is a generic name of the following inventions E1 to E6, the invention F is a generic name of the following inventions F1 to F3, and the invention G is the following invention G1. -G3 is a general term, Invention H is a generic name of the following Inventions H1-H4, Invention I is a generic name of the following Inventions I1-I5, and Invention J is a generic name of the following Inventions J1-J4. is there.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to the invention A1 is
A start winning area (starting ports 11 and 12) provided in a game area (game area 6) in which game balls can flow down and into which game balls can enter;
When the game ball enters the start winning area, it is determined whether or not to enter into an advantageous gaming state (a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a short-time state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than usual. Determination means (the microcomputer 101 for game control performing S1602 and S1609),
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Production control means (microcomputer 121 for production control) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability (hit probability) that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The effect control means executes a specific effect (set value effect) related to the set value set by the set value based on the number of game balls (out ball) discharged to the outside of the game area. It is characterized by that.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to the invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A1,
The effect control means is that when the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area is at least a predetermined threshold (out ball determination value) or more, the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is to be established. The specific effect may be executed.

8-1-3. Invention A3
A gaming machine according to the invention A3,
A game area (game area 6) in which a game ball can flow down is formed, and a winning area (general winning port 10, start ports 11, 12, and big winning port 14) into which the game ball can enter is provided. A gaming machine in which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters the winning area,
The winning area includes a starting winning area (starting ports 11 and 12),
When the game ball enters the start winning area, it is determined whether or not to enter into an advantageous gaming state (a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a short-time state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than usual. Determination means (the microcomputer 101 for game control performing S1602 and S1609),
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Production control means (microcomputer 121 for production control) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The effect control means is configured to set the set value based on a difference number that is a difference between the number of the paid-out prize balls and the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area. A specific effect (setting value effect) related to the value may be executed.

8-1-4. Invention A4
A gaming machine according to the invention A4,
A gaming machine according to invention A3,
The effect control means may execute the specific effect when the difference number reaches a predetermined threshold value (difference number determination value).

8-1-5. Invention A5
A gaming machine according to the invention A5,
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions A1 to A4,
The specific effect is an effect suggesting the set value set by the set value.

8-1-6. Invention A6
A gaming machine according to the invention A6,
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions A1 to A5,
It further comprises operation means (set value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation to the operation means.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to the invention B1 is
Predictive conditions are established (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of reserved figures <4 is less than 4 and winning the second starting port 12 when the number of reserved figures 2 is less than 4). Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter into an advantageous gaming state (such as jackpot gaming state, high probability state, short-time state),
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Production control means (microcomputer 121 for production control) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The effect control means can execute a specific effect (set value effect) based on the set value,
The execution frequency of the specific effect varies depending on the set value.

8-2-2. Invention B2
A gaming machine according to Invention B2
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
The production control means includes
In the display unit (display unit 50a), based on the determination result by the determination unit, after the production symbol (composite symbol G22) is variably displayed, it can be stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying the determination result,
The specific effect is executed with the effect symbol when the stop display is performed.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to the invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B2,
The effect control means is capable of executing the specific effect when the determining means determines not to enter the advantageous gaming state.

8-2-4. Invention B4
A gaming machine according to the invention B4,
A gaming machine according to Invention B2 or Invention B3,
The production symbol has a first part (lottery result suggesting part G22a) related to the determination result of the determining means, and a second part (setting value suggesting part G22b) related to the set value,
The determination result of the determination means is informed by the contents (numbers) displayed in the first part of the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the contents (◯, Δ, and) displayed in the second part of the effect symbol. It is possible to execute the specific effect at x).

8-2-5. Invention B5
The gaming machine according to the invention B5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B5,
It further comprises operation means (set value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation to the operation means.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to the invention C1 is
Predictive conditions are established (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of reserved figures <4 is less than 4 and winning the second starting port 12 when the number of reserved figures 2 is less than 4). Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter into an advantageous gaming state (such as jackpot gaming state, high probability state, short-time state),
In the display unit (special drawing display 81), display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) for executing variable display of identification information (special drawing) for notifying the judgment result based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Game control microcomputer 101),
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Production control means (microcomputer 121 for production control) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The production control means is capable of executing a specific production (setting value production) related to the set value based on the number of executions of variable display of the identification information.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to the invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The set value is composed of natural numbers (1 to 6),
The production control means can execute the specific production on the condition that a predetermined number of consecutive digits (lower two digits, lower three digits) of the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information are the same number. It is characterized by that.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to the invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C2,
The effect control means is provided on the condition that the predetermined number of digits is the same number, and the determination result that is a notification target of variable display of the identification information is to enter the advantageous gaming state. Can be executed.

8-3-4. Invention C4
A gaming machine according to the invention C4,
A gaming machine according to invention C2 or invention C3,
The specific effects include a first specific effect (odd setting suggestion effect) that suggests that the set value is an odd number, and a second specific effect (even setting suggestion effect) that indicates that the set value is an even number. There is,
The production control means includes
The first specific effect can be executed based on the predetermined number of digits being the same odd number,
The second specific effect can be executed based on the predetermined number of digits being the same even number.

8-3-5. Invention C5
The gaming machine according to the invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to invention C4,
The specific effect includes, in addition to the first specific effect and the second specific effect, a third specific effect (odd high setting) that suggests that the setting value is an odd set value with a high probability. And a fourth specific effect (even even high setting suggesting effect) that suggests that the probability is an even set value among the set values,
The production control means includes
Based on the fact that the last two digits of the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information are the same odd number, the first specific effect can be executed,
Based on the fact that the last two digits of the number of executions of variable display of the identification information are the same even number, the second specific effect can be executed,
Based on the fact that the last three digits of the number of executions of variable display of the identification information are the same odd number, the third specific effect can be executed,
The fourth specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the last three digits of the number of executions of variable display of the identification information are the same even number.

8-3-6. Invention C6
The gaming machine according to the invention C6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention C1 to Invention C5,
It further comprises operation means (set value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation to the operation means.

8-3-7. Invention C7
A gaming machine according to the invention C7,
Players than in the normal gaming state due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning to the first starting port 11 when the number of reserved figure 1 hold <4, winning to the second starting port 12 when the number of reserved figure 2 hold <4) Determining means (game control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to make an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the game (a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a short-time state, etc.);
In the display unit (special drawing display 81), display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) for executing variable display of identification information (special drawing) for notifying the judgment result based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Game control microcomputer 101),
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Production control means (microcomputer 121 for production control) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The production control means is capable of executing a specific production (setting value production) related to the set value based on the number of times the advantageous gaming state is reached.

8-3-8. Invention C8
The gaming machine according to the invention C8 is
A gaming machine according to invention C7,
The advantageous game state is a state in which a special game (a jackpot game) capable of acquiring a predetermined game privilege is being executed,
The determination means determines whether or not to execute the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
Game state control means (games for performing S1504 and S1506) that can set a specific game state (high probability state, short time state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state with the end of the special game. A control microcomputer 101);
The gaming state control means sets the normal gaming state from the specific gaming state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
The effect control means is capable of executing the specific effect based on the number of times the special game is executed without satisfying the end condition after the special game is executed.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to the invention D1 is
Predictive conditions are established (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of reserved figures <4 is less than 4 and winning the second starting port 12 when the number of reserved figures 2 is less than 4). Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter into an advantageous gaming state (such as jackpot gaming state, high probability state, short-time state),
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Production control means (microcomputer 121 for production control) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The production control means includes
In the display unit (display unit 50a), after a plurality of effect symbols (effect symbols G10) are variably displayed based on the determination result by the determination means, it is possible to stop display in a manner in which the determination result is notified. Yes,
A specific effect (setting value effect) suggesting the set value can be executed by the plurality of effect symbols that are stopped and displayed.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to the invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention D1,
When the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is not set, the effect control means can execute the specific effect according to the plurality of effect symbols stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying that the advantageous gaming state is not set. It is characterized by being.

8-4-3. Invention D3
A gaming machine according to the invention D3,
A gaming machine according to invention D2,
The production control means includes
When the variation display of the plurality of effect symbols is performed, the plurality of effect symbols can be in a reach state,
When the plurality of effect symbols that are not executed in the reach state are displayed, the specific effect can be executed by the plurality of effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in such a manner that the advantageous game state is not notified. It is characterized by being.

8-4-4. Invention D4
A gaming machine according to the invention D4,
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention D1 to Invention D3,
It further comprises operation means (set value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation to the operation means.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to the invention E1 is
Predictive conditions are established (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of reserved figures <4 is less than 4 and winning the second starting port 12 when the number of reserved figures 2 is less than 4). Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter into an advantageous gaming state (such as jackpot gaming state, high probability state, short-time state),
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Production control means (microcomputer 121 for production control) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The set value includes a first set value (set value 1 to set value 4), a second set value (set value 5 to set value 6) having a higher probability than the first set value, There is
As the production contents of the predetermined production that can be executed by the production control means, there are a first production content (win and success) and a second production content (defeat and failure),
When the first set value is set, after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is executed by the effect control means, a specific event (a jackpot gaming state, Continuation of round game, high probability state, continuation of high probability state, etc.) may occur, and the specific event occurs after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed by the effect control means Never to
When the second set value is set, the specific event may occur after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is executed by the effect control unit. The specific event may occur even after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to the invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous game state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) is executed to execute a special game (big hit game) that can acquire a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) as the advantageous game state. A game control microcomputer 101),
The specific event is the execution of the special game.

8-5-3. Invention E3
A gaming machine according to the invention E3,
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous game state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) is executed to execute a special game (big hit game) that can acquire a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) as the advantageous game state. A game control microcomputer 101),
In the special game, a plurality of unit games (round game) are executed,
The special game includes a time when the unit game is executed a first number of times and a time when the unit game is executed a second number of times after the first number of times.
The specific event is characterized in that the unit game is further executed a second number of times after the first number of times.

8-5-4. Invention E4
A gaming machine according to the invention E4,
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous game state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) is executed to execute a special game (big hit game) that can acquire a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) as the advantageous game state. Game control microcomputer 101),
Specific game state setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1506) that sets a specific game state (high probability state, short time state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state with the end of the special game; Further comprising
The specific event is a setting of the specific gaming state.

8-5-5. Invention E5
The gaming machine according to the invention E5 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous game state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) is executed to execute a special game (big hit game) that can acquire a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) as the advantageous game state. Game control microcomputer 101),
Specific game state setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1506) that sets a specific game state (high probability state, short time state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state with the end of the special game; Further comprising
The specific gaming state can be continued for a first period, and can be continued for a second period after continuing the first period,
The specific event is characterized in that the specific gaming state can be continued for the second period after the first period is continued.

8-5-6. Invention E6
The gaming machine according to the invention E6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions E1 to E5,
It further comprises operation means (set value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation to the operation means.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to the invention F1 is
Predictive conditions are established (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of reserved figures <4 is less than 4 and winning the second starting port 12 when the number of reserved figures 2 is less than 4). Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter into an advantageous gaming state (such as jackpot gaming state, high probability state, short-time state),
In the display unit (special drawing display 81), display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) for executing variable display of identification information (special drawing) for notifying the judgment result based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Game control microcomputer 101),
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Production control means (microcomputer 121 for production control) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The effect control means is a specification that suggests the set value based on a specific number of times (the number of hooks) that is the number of times that the variable display of the identification information is continuously executed without determining that the determination means enters the advantageous gaming state. An effect (setting value effect) can be executed.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to the invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention F1,
The specific effects include a first specific effect and a second specific effect.
The production control means can execute the first specific production when the specific number of times reaches the first number, and the specific number of times reaches a second number greater than the first number of times. The second specific performance can be executed on the occasion of
The second specific effect is easier to recognize the set value than the first specific effect.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to the invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to invention F1 or invention F2,
It further comprises operation means (set value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation to the operation means.

8-7-1. Invention G1
The gaming machine according to the invention G1 is
When a predetermined condition is established (a prize at the first start port 11 when the number of reserved figures <1 holds <4, a prize at the second start port 12 when the number of reserved figures 2 holds <4), a predetermined game privilege (award ball) ) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (a jackpot game) that can be acquired),
A special game control means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Production control means (microcomputer 121 for production control) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to execute the special game is different,
In the special game, a plurality of unit games (round game) are executed,
The special game includes a plurality of types of special games (fifth big hit game to ninth big hit game) depending on the number of unit games executed,
The production control means includes
The number of unit games is maximized when at least one of the plurality of setting values including the maximum setting value (setting value 6) that is the setting value having the highest probability among the setting values is set. In the maximum special game that is the special game, there may be a maximum special game suggestion effect (blessing effect) that suggests that the maximum special game is being executed,
When the maximum set value is set, the maximum special game suggesting effect may suggest that the maximum set value is set.

8-7-2. Invention G2
The gaming machine according to the invention G2 is
A gaming machine according to invention G1,
In the maximum special game suggestion effect, a first maximum special game suggestion effect (maximum set value suggestion blessing effect) that suggests that the maximum set value is set, and the maximum set value are set. There is a second largest special game suggestion production (normal blessing production) that does not suggest,
The production control means includes
When the maximum set value is set, the first maximum special game suggestion effect or the second maximum special game suggestion effect can be executed,
When a setting value other than the maximum value setting value is set, the second maximum special game suggesting effect can be executed.

8-7-3. Invention G3
The gaming machine according to the invention G3 is
A gaming machine according to invention G1 or invention G2,
It further comprises operation means (set value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation to the operation means.

8-8-1. Invention H1
The gaming machine according to the invention H1 is
Predictive conditions are established (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of reserved figures <4 is less than 4 and winning the second starting port 12 when the number of reserved figures 2 is less than 4). Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter into an advantageous gaming state (such as jackpot gaming state, high probability state, short-time state),
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Production control means (microcomputer 121 for production control) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The production control means includes
In the display unit, based on the determination result by the determination means, after the effect symbol (effect symbol G10) is variably displayed, the display can be stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying the determination result,
Based on the set value, it is possible to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

8-8-2. Invention H2
The gaming machine according to the invention H2 is
A gaming machine according to invention H1,
The effect control means can start the effect symbol variation display based on the set value with respect to the effect symbol variation display performed first after the gaming machine is turned on. It is characterized by being.

8-8-3. Invention H3
The gaming machine according to the invention H3 is
A gaming machine according to invention H1 or invention H2,
The production control means includes a display mode (normal start mode) when the production symbol starts variable display when the set value of the day and the set value of the previous day are the same, and the set value of the day When the setting value of the previous day is different, the display mode (first special start mode, second special start mode) when the effect symbol starts to be displayed may be different.

8-8-4. Invention H4
The gaming machine according to the invention H4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions H1 to H3,
It further comprises operation means (set value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation to the operation means.

8-9-1. Invention I1
The gaming machine according to the invention I1 is
When a predetermined condition is established (a prize at the first start port 11 when the number of reserved figures <1 holds <4, a prize at the second start port 12 when the number of reserved figures 2 holds <4), a predetermined game privilege (award ball) ) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) for determining whether to execute the first special game (big hit game) or the second special game (small hit game) that can be acquired),
If it is determined by the determination means that the first special game is to be executed, first special game control means for executing the first special game (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1505);
When it is determined by the determination means that the second special game is to be executed, second special game control means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1507) for executing the second special game;
A game state setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1506) capable of newly setting a game state (high probability state or the like) upon completion of the first special game;
Setting value setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6);
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
The probability that the determination unit determines to execute the first special game differs depending on the set value.

8-9-2. Invention I2
The gaming machine according to the invention I2 is
A gaming machine according to Invention I1,
The probability that it is determined that neither the first special game or the second special game is executed depends on the set value.

8-9-3. Invention I3
A gaming machine according to the invention I3,
A gaming machine according to the invention I2,
Regardless of the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to execute the second special game is substantially the same.

8-9-4. Invention I4
A gaming machine according to the invention I4,
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions I1 to I3,
The predetermined condition includes a first condition (winning to the first starting port 11 when the number of reserved figures <4 holds <4) and a second condition (winning the second starting port 12 when the number of reserved figures 2 holds <4). )
The determination means includes first determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first special game or the second special game when the first condition is satisfied (game control microcomputer 101 performing S1602). And second determination means for determining whether to execute the first special game or the second special game when the second condition is satisfied (game control microcomputer 101 performing S1609). ,
Regardless of the set value, the probability that the first determination means determines to execute the second special game is substantially the same,
Regardless of the set value, the probability that the second determination means determines to execute the second special game is substantially the same,
The probability that the first determination unit determines to execute the second special game is different from the probability that the second determination unit determines to execute the second special game.

8-9-5. Invention I5
The gaming machine according to the invention I5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention I1 to Invention I4,
It further comprises operation means (set value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation to the operation means.

8-10-1. Invention J1
The gaming machine according to the invention J1 is
Predictive conditions are established (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of reserved figures <4 is less than 4 and winning the second starting port 12 when the number of reserved figures 2 is less than 4). Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter into an advantageous gaming state (such as jackpot gaming state, high probability state, short-time state),
Setting means for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The setting means may set the setting value by determining which setting value to set.

8-10-2. Invention J2
The gaming machine according to the invention J2 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
It further comprises a switching operation means (setting value setting method switching switch 74) capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options,
The plurality of options include at least a first specific option (for example, random settings A and D) and a second specific option (for example, random settings B and C),
When the setting means sets a part or all of the plurality of setting values in the determination when the first specific option is selected and when the second specific option is selected It is characterized by different probabilities of determination.

8-10-3. Invention J3
The gaming machine according to the invention J3 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
A first switching operation means (setting value setting method switching switch 74) capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options;
A second switching operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation of switching the setting value;
The plurality of options include at least specific options (random setting A to random setting D) and non-specific options (random setting OFF),
The setting means includes
When the specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value by the determination,
When the non-specific option is selected, the set value can be set based on an operation to the second switching operation means.

8-10-4. Invention J4
The gaming machine according to the invention J4 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
A first switching operation means (setting value setting method switching switch 74) capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options;
A second switching operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation of switching the setting value;
The plurality of options include at least a first specific option (random setting A, random setting D), a second specific option (random setting B, random setting C), and a non-specific option (random setting OFF). ,
The setting means includes
When the first specific option or the second specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value by the determination,
When the non-specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value based on an operation to the second switching operation means,
When the setting means sets a part or all of the plurality of setting values in the determination when the first specific option is selected and when the second specific option is selected It is characterized by different probabilities of determination.

PY1 ... Pachinko machine 1 ... Game board 11 ... First start port 11a ... First start port sensor 12 ... Second start port 12a ... Second start port sensor 14 ... Grand prize port 14a ... Grand prize port sensor 50 ... Image display Device 50a ... Display unit 52 ... Speaker 53 ... Frame lamp 55 ... Panel movable device 55k ... Panel movable body 70 ... Set value cylinder 70a ... Set value cylinder sensor 71 ... Set value switch 71 ... Set value switch sensor 74 ... Set value switch method Changeover switch 74a ... set value setting method changeover switch sensor 100 ... game control board 101 ... game control microcomputer 120 ... effect control board 121 ... effect control microcomputer 140 ... image control board

Claims (4)

A determination means for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than normal by the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Setting means for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to be in the advantageous gaming state is different,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the setting means may set the setting value by determining which setting value to set. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
Further comprising a switching operation means capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options,
The plurality of options include at least a first specific option and a second specific option,
When the setting means sets a part or all of the plurality of setting values in the determination when the first specific option is selected and when the second specific option is selected A gaming machine characterized by different probabilities of determination. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A first switching operation means capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options;
A second switching operation means capable of performing an operation of switching the set value,
The plurality of options include at least a specific option and a non-specific option,
The setting means includes
When the specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value by the determination,
When the non-specific option is selected, the setting value can be set based on an operation to the second switching operation means. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A first switching operation means capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options;
A second switching operation means capable of performing an operation of switching the set value,
The plurality of options include at least a first specific option, a second specific option, and a non-specific option,
The setting means includes
When the first specific option or the second option is selected, it is possible to set the set value by the determination,
When the non-specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value based on an operation to the second switching operation means,
When the setting means sets a part or all of the plurality of setting values in the determination when the first specific option is selected and when the second specific option is selected A gaming machine characterized by different probabilities of determination.